Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
TASKalfa 2553ci/3253ci
3553ci/4053ci/5053ci
6053ci
PF-7100/7110/7120
DP-7100/7110/7120/7130
DF-7100/7110/7120/7130
AK-7110/MT-730(B)
BF-730/BF-9100
PH-7A/C/D/PH-7100/7120/7130
FAX System 12
Printing System 15
SERVICE MANUAL
Published in March 2019
Rev.2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
CAUTION
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for
details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux
de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 2018/12/11 1-5Page Add: Resolution (Reading)
1-9Page Correction:
High capacity paper feeder → Large capacity feeder
Side Deck → Side feeder
4-321Page Add:
4-330Page (10)Punch Unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) (Optional)
4-332Page (16)Finisher (DF-7130) (Optional)
(17)Booklet Unit (BF-9100) (Optional)
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Contents
Contents
(1-3)When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send, the scanned data is automatically
sent. ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-400
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes) ............................................................................................................... 7-401
(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes ........................................................................................................ 7-401
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes ............................................................................................................ 7-406
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes ........................................................................................................... 7-410
7 - 6 Print Errors............................................................................................................................................ 7-413
(1) The paper loading message appears ................................................................................................... 7-414
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set .................................... 7-414
(3) Color tone differs with the printed photo ............................................................................................... 7-415
(4) Orientation is different........................................................................................................................... 7-416
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray ............................................................................................................... 7-416
(6) Garbled characters ............................................................................................................................... 7-418
(7) Data is output with monochrome .......................................................................................................... 7-418
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray ......................................................................................................... 7-418
(9) The same data is repeatedly printed out .............................................................................................. 7-418
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-419
(11) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated ........................ 7-419
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error Processing/Memory lamp is
turned on ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-419
(13) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up
Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are lit ............................................................................ 7-420
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)....................................................................... 7-421
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (2)....................................................................... 7-421
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (3)....................................................................... 7-421
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (4)....................................................................... 7-422
(18) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (5)....................................................................... 7-422
(19) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (6)....................................................................... 7-423
(20) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (7)....................................................................... 7-423
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1) ................................................................... 7-424
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (2) ................................................................... 7-424
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (3) ................................................................... 7-424
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (4) ................................................................... 7-425
(25) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (5) ................................................................... 7-425
(26) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (6) ................................................................... 7-425
(27) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (7) ................................................................... 7-425
(28) The printed image is partly missing ...................................................................................................... 7-426
(29) 'Paper Mismatch Error' appears............................................................................................................ 7-426
7 - 7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................... 7-427
(1) Check the document processor' appears ............................................................................................. 7-428
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting the cassette
and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit ............................................................................. 7-429
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting the cassette
and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit ............................................................................. 7-430
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover ........................................................... 7-430
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover ......... 7-431
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray........................................ 7-431
(7) The message 'Waste toner box is full.' is wrongly displayed ................................................................ 7-432
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed ................... 7-432
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed......................... 7-432
(10) The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.................................................... 7-433
(11) The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed..................................... 7-433
(12) The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'. ........................................ 7-434
(13) Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB. ........................................................................................ 7-435
(14) Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available. .......................................................... 7-435
(15) The message "The toner container is not properly installed." appears frequently................................ 7-435
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130): Optional item (Enhancement) for DF-7100 ........................... 9-189
(10) Finisher (DF-7110)................................................................................................................................ 9-190
(11) Mailbox (MT-730(B)): Optional item (Enhancement) for DF-7110 ........................................................ 9-191
(12) Folding unit (BF-730): DF-7110 only .................................................................................................... 9-192
(13) Punch Unit (PH-7): Optional item (Enhancement) for DF-7110/7120/7130.......................................... 9-193
(14) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)............................................................................................................. 9-194
(15) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)............................................................................................................. 9-195
(16) Booklet Unit (BF-9100): DF-7130 only.................................................................................................. 9-198
9 - 1 Installation Guide .................................................................................................................................. 9-199
(1) PF-7100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-199
(2) PF-7110 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-212
(3) PF-7120 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-233
(4) DP-7100................................................................................................................................................ 9-260
(5) DP-7110/ DP-7130 ............................................................................................................................... 9-291
(6) DP-7120................................................................................................................................................ 9-326
(7) DF-7100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-357
(8) DF-7110 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-366
(9) DF-7120 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-386
(10) AK-7110 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-403
(11) MT-730(B)............................................................................................................................................. 9-410
(12) BF-730 .................................................................................................................................................. 9-424
(13) PH-7A/B/C/D......................................................................................................................................... 9-442
(14) PH-7100/7110/7120/7130..................................................................................................................... 9-452
(15) JS-7100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-470
(16) FAX-System 12..................................................................................................................................... 9-474
(17) Printing-System 15 ............................................................................................................................... 9-489
(18) DF-7130 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-499
(19) BF-9100 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-518
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
1Specification
1 - 1 Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Specification
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycle, Preprint, Bond, Hagaki, Color, Punched, Letterhead,
Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycle, Preprint, Bond,
Tray Hagaki, Color, Punched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Yokei 4, Yokei 2, Chokei 3,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 x 148 to 297 x356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Yokei 4, Yokei 2, Chokei 3,
Custum 1 to 4 (98 x 148 to 320 x 457 mm)
Multi Purpose A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 x 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Tray Statement, Executive, 12 x 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Yonaga 3, Chokei 3. Chokei 4
Custom 1 to 4 (98 x 148 mm to 320 x 457 mm)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (10 x 488.1 to 304.8 x 1,219 mm/ 8.26" x 19.22" to 12" x
48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm or less
1-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Items Specification
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m2)*1, 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Separation system Small diameter separation and separation needle (Input DC voltage)
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Items Specification
Large capacity storage 25/32 ppm model: SSD 32 GB (SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB *4)
35/40/50/60 ppm models: SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB
Weight (without toner container) 25/32 ppm model: Approx. 90 kg/Approx. 198.4 lbs (without toner container)
35/40/50/60 ppm models: Approx. 95 kg/Approx. 209.4 lbs (without toner
container)
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
B5 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B5 32 sheets/min 32 sheets/min
B5 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
B5 40 sheets/min 40 sheets/min
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Specification
Items Black and White Full Color Copy
Copy
Copy Speed 50 ppm model A3/Ledger 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min 55 sheets/min
First Copy Time Black and White 25 ppm model: 6.4 seconds or less
(A4, place on the 32 ppm model: 5.3 seconds or less
platen, feed from 35 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Cassette)
40 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 3.7 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 3.4 seconds or less
Copy Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
1-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy Speed.
First Print Time (A4) 25 ppm model 7.0 seconds or less 9.2 seconds or less
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open
XPS
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High
compressive), Text Recognition PDF (Optional), MS Office file (Optional)
Scan Speed *1 Black and White 25/32 ppm model 80 images/min, Color 80 Images/min
(A4, 300 dpi, simplex
35/40/50/60 ppm 1-sided: B/W 120 images/min, Color 120 Images/min
Image quality:
model
Text/Photo
original) Black and White 25/32 ppm model B/W 180 Images/min, Color 180 Images/min
duplex
35/40/50/60 ppm B/W 220 images/min, Color 220 Images/min
model
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 *1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Win-
dows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016
*3 Operating System Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Win-
dows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016
1-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m²
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m²
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 50 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2) *1 (50 to 80 g/m2) *1 (50 to 80 g/m2) *1
Paper size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki, Kakugata 2, Yokei 4, Yokei 2, Chokei 3,
Custum 1 to 4 (98x148 to 320x457 mm)
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Paper Size (80 g/m²) A3, B4, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray Envelope C4: 250 sheets
(No stapling) A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive,
16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, 216x340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
to limit Oficio II, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
1-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size (80 g/ Finisher tray (No A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
m²) staple) Executive, 12x8", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, Ledger, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
to limit Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
Space Required (WxD) 666x618.5 mm/26.23"x24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Paper Size (80 g/ Tray A (No A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II,
m²) stapling) Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 1,500 sheetsA5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-
R, 16K, ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,Youkei 2:
200 sheets
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, Ledger, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
to limit Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
Space Required (WxD) 725x668.5 mm/26.23"x24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
Paper Size (80 g/ Tray A (No A3, B4, B5-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II,
m²) stapling) Folio, 8K: Hight 227 mm (1,500 sheets equivalent)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R, 16K: Hight 512 mm (4,000 sheets
equivalent)
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: Hight 91 mm (500 sheets equivalent)
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Ofukuhagaki,
Kakugata 2 go, Yokei 4 go, Yokei 2 go, Chokei 3 go, Chokei 4 go: Hight 45 mm
(200 sheets equivalent)
Stapling Number of sheets A3, B4, 216x340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
to limit Legal, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 35 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 100 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
16K-R, 16K 70 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheets only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,
Thick, High Quality, Custom
1-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Items Specification
Dimension (WxDxH) 870x687x1,181 mm
Space Required (WxD) 870x687 mm/34.3"x27.0" (with the tray pulled out)
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom
Paper Size (80 g/m²) A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216x340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Dimension (WxDxH) 510x400x470 mm/20.08"x15.75"x18.51"
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Items Specification
Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Media type Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom
Paper size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216x340 mm, SRA3,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12x18", Oficio II, Folio,
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
EnvelopeMonarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom
(98x148 to 304.8x1,220 mm)
1-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Items Specification
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Original Size Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm/63"
Number of fax originals to auto feed Max. 270 sheets (with optional document processor)
Multi-Station Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100
stations for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7,000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Operating system Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows
Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016
Transmission Resolution Ultra fine (400x400dpi), Fine (200x200dpi), Normal (100x200dpi), 600x600dpi
Document Size Letter, Legal, Ledger (11x17), Statement, A3, A4, A5, Folio, B4, B5 (JIS)
Scheduled job Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)
Transmit and Print Fax transmission and print out at the machine is available
Broadcast Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100
stations for i-Fax)
1-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Specifications
Items Specification
User Login/Job Accounting In case that “User Login” is set in main unit, Login User Name and Password
have to be registered by the Network FAX Driver setting.
In case that “Job Accounting” is set in main unit, Account ID has to be registered
by the Network FAX Driver setting.
Cover Page Network FAX driver allows to select cover page format and to create templates.
1-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
1 - 2 Part Names
(1) Main unit appearance
22
13 12 11
14 21
10 15
2 9
16 20
3 17 19
8
7
4 18
5
18
6
1-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
30
29
28
27
26
23
24 25
1-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
(2) Connectors/Interior
1
2
3 5
4 6
7
8
1
9
10
11
1-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
10
11
1
3 9
5 2
4
2 3 9 8
6 7
7 6
1-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
1-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
1 2 3 4 5
2 [Job Separator] indicator Lights when there is paper on the job separator tray.
3 [Data] lamp Blink when printing, sending/receiving data or accessing to HDD/SSD And lit
when FAX (Send) is waiting for timer.
4 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
5 [Energy Saver] key Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep Mode.
1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
Admin
Authentic./
Logout 10
Select the function.
9
System Menu
/Counter
Interrupt
8
Copy Send FAX Custom Box Numeric
7
Keypad
11
Reset 6
Job Box USB Drive FAX Box Internet Browser
Stop 5
Status/
Job Cancel
Device
Information
L ang uag e Paper
Settings
Wi-Fi Direct Help Program
Start 4
Status 08/08/2018 14:00
Status/
Job Cancel Copy Function Send Function FAX Function
Accessibility
Display
3
1 2 2 2
No Name Specification
1. [Status/Job Cancel] key Display the Status/Job Cancel screen.
2 Function Key These keys enable functions and applications, such as copy or scan, to be registered.
3 [Accessibility Display] key This key is to magnify the screen in Copy mode or Send mode.
4 [Start] key Start copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
10 [Authentication/Logout] key Authenticate user switching, and exit the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).
1-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
1 - 3 Enhance Configuration
The following enhancements are available for this model.
(2) MT-730(B)
(1) PLATEN COVER
TYPE E
(14) PH-7A, PH-7C, (13) PH-7100,
PH-7D PH-7120, PH-7130
(12) DF-7100
(15) JS-7100
(10) PF-7120*
(6) BF-730
(5) DF-7120
* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
1-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
(15) NK-7120
(16) NK-7120, NK-7130 (18)
(20) FAX
FAX System
System 12
12 (23) (25)
IC Card
(17) DT-730(B)
(B) Kit(B)
Authentication
(19) IB-50
(21) IB-50
(21)
(23) IB-35
IB-35
(20)
(22) IB-51
IB-51
(22)
(24) HD-12
HD-12
Optional Software
(26) Internet FAX Kit(A)
(27) UG-33
(28) UG-34
1-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
Enhancement scan copy originals automatically. Also duplex copying and split copying are available.
See following for Document processor operation.
PLATEN COVER TYPE E can be used instead of Document processor.
Note
In order to use the mail box, change output tray with either print driver, operation panel or initial setting.
1-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
(18) Printing System 15 "Fiery Controller" (Option for 32ppm/ 35ppm/ 40ppm/ 50ppm/60ppm
model)
When the Fiery Controller is installed, the regular print function of a machine can be replaced with the print function of
1-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
the Fiery Controller. The Fiery Controller print functions enable a variety of printing features that are not possible on a
regular machine, such as advanced color management that reproduces the true color of the image by reading each
machine's color display method and characteristics at the time of printing.
(24) HD-12 “Hard disk drive” (Optional item for low models)
HDD is for storing printing data. This enables high-speed printing of multiple set using an electric sort function.
1-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Enhance Configuration
1-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Module map
1 - 4 Module map
Unit configuration of each models are follows.
Items Specification
CT-8550 (302ND9301*)
CT-8560 (302ND9302*)
TR-8550 (302ND9315*)
100V 100V
DV-8350K (J) 302L79J01* DV-8560K (J) 302V89J02*
DV-8350M (J) 302L79J02* DV-8560M (J) 302V89J03*
DV-8350C (J) 302L79J03* DV-8560C (J) 302V89J04*
DV-8350Y (J) 302L79J04* DV-8560Y (J) 302V89J05*
120/220-240V 120/220-240V
DV-8350K 302L79301* DV-8560K 302V89302*
DV-8350M 302L79302* DV-8560M 302V89303*
DV-8350C 302L79303* DV-8560C 302V89304*
DV-8350Y 302L79304* DV-8560Y 302V89305*
Fuser Sliding IH fuser pressures Sliding IH fuser pressures system (Diameter 35 mm)
system (Diameter 30 mm)
IH 100/120V 100/120V
FK-8600IH 302VH9301* (FK-8590IH) 302ND9310*
220-240V 220-240V
FK-8605IH 302VH9302 (FK-8595IH) 302ND9309
1-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Module map
Items Specification
1-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Environment
2Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (Humidity should be 70% or less
when the temperature is 90.5°F (32.5°C).)
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
Environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows: Humidity: 36 to
65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations.
• Locations where the sunlight is hit directly such as the window.
• Locations with vibrations
• Locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
• Locations with where hot or cold air is hit directly.
• Poorly ventilated locations
The floor material may be damaged by moving this product in case of a delicate material.
During operation, ozone is released, but its amount does not affects one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. In order to keep a comfortable environment, ventilation of
the room has to be considered.
2-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Environment
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
START
*: Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes for high-end model, approx. 6 minutes for low-end model
Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.
2-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
Caution
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2 Put the optical lock cover (b) into the aperture of the hook (c) to fit in the direction of the arrow.
• C3100 error occurs when miss releasing the lock.
1 a
2 b c
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1 Pull out cassette 1 and 2. Remove thelift plate stopper from each cassette andattach it to the storage location.
• When moving the machine, attach the lift plate stopper to original position.
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
2-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1 Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2 Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
• Check if it does not come off by lifting up the sub tray (a).
b c
a
d e
Attach the bundled Right lower cover as shown below when the optional feeder is not installed.
1 Insert two protrusions (b) on the lower rear cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
c
a
b
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Connect a USB cable to the main Printer USB 3.0 adaptable cable (Super-Speed USB
unit compatible, Max. 5.0 m long)
Important
It can be cause of failure not to use USB 3.0 adaptable cable.
2-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface located on the right side of the main unit.
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
ADSL
Connect the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC
d
a c
ISDN
Connect the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b
2-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
a. Modular jack
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c: Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• Bending or curling causes paper jam.
• Storing paper under high temperature and high humidity after opening the package, gets trouble because of
absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag. Also, seal
the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• Setting paper in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may spoil the paper.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
Important
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or failures.
2-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1
2
3
6
5 4 7
5 Cassette Fix A4, Letter or B5. Plain, Vellum, Recycle, 1,500 2-24
3 Preprint, Bond, Hagaki, sheets
Color, Punched, (80 g/m2)
6 Cassette Letterhead, Thick,
4 Envelope, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
7 Cassette 3,000 2-26
2 sheets
(80 g/m2)
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Note
Do not pull out multiple cassettes at once.
Note
In case of using Legal size, move the paper length guide to the leftmost and lay it down.
2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
4 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
Caution
5 Check if the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
6 Insert the cassette all the way into the main unit gentry.
2-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Note
Do not pull out multiple cassettes at once.
Note
Move the paper length guide to the leftmost in case of using 12x18".
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Note
Adjust the additional paper size guide in case of using SRA3/12x18", A3 or Leger.
4 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Caution
5 Check if the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
6 Insert the cassette all the way into the main unit gentry.
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
8 Check if the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
1 Insert the cassette all the way into the main unit gentry.
2-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
Caution
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Note
Default paper size is A4/Letter. Please see Operation guide for changing paper size. A4 to B5, A4 to Letter or
Letter to A4.
(See page 9-212)
Run Maintenance mode U208 for paper size setting after change the size.
2-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
2 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
Caution
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Note
Default paper size is A4/Letter. Please see Operation guide for changing paper size. A4 to B5, A4 to Letter or
Letter to A4.
(See page 2-13)
Run Maintenance mode U208 for paper size setting after change the size.
2-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
ON
a b
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Important
The container cover can not be opened unless the power is on. Turn on the power and release the container
cover lock then open the front cover.
Important
Do not touch the part with perforation by hand.
5~ 5~
2-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
5~
5~
CLICK!
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Authentic./
Admin Logout
Interrupt
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. This date and time
is recorded on a mail header once sending mail with send function of main unit.
Setting value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in A.D.
Value: Month/ Day/ Year, Day/ Month/ Year, Year/ Month/ Day
2-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting].
Note
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
Login with administrator privileges.
The factory default of login user name and login password are shown below.
Important
Restart the network from System Menu, or turn the power off and then on waiting 5 seconds or more.
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Low-end model
1 Maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 - 2000m], [2001 - 3000m] or [3001 - 3500m].
High-end model
• Select [AC Calib] if the developer leak appears after setting the above.
Select U140 >[AC Calib] > [Magnification] and make the values of C, M, Y and K lower.
2-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
1 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2 Input "952" using the numeric keys and press {Start] key.
3 Select [Execute].
4 Select [Setup] for main unit and [EH Setup] for optional units.
5 Select maintenance modes listed on the display from top to bottom and press [Start] key to return to
maintenance mode.
7 Press [Stop] key to get back to flow after finish each modes.
• In case that not executing the U952, set them with procedures below individually.
2 Select [Calib].
3 Select [Execute].
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
3 Place the test chart 1 on to platen glass table with face down and arrow side far.
• Put approximately 20 sheets of white paper on to the chart.
5 Repeat same procedures as step 3 and 4 with the rest of charts #2 and #3.
2 Select [Maintenance] and press [Start] key to output the maintenance report.
2 Select [Execute].
2 Select [Today].
2-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
(17) Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)
1 Make sure that each indicators are not blinking, and then turn the power switch off.
Note
In case of selecting [On], set sensitivity of the sensor. The levels are
[1] (Low) to [3] (High)
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the main unit
Important
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more,
and then turn on the power switch.
2-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
2-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
2-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
17
18
13
11
19
10
20
9 21
22
8 15 23
14 24 6
5
9
4
3 12
2-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
2-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
2-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
7 15
12 13 14 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
2-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
2-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
4
10
11
2
2
13
12
8
9
7 5
2-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
4
6 18
19
16 17 15
14
5
20 11
20 20 13
1 12
3
20
20 2 20
2-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
4
20 21
14
16 17 18 19
12
15
13
22 9
22 22
11
10
1 3
22
22 2 22
2-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
10
12
8
9
7
4 5
5 4
2-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
2-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
2-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
10
5 4
3 1
2-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
8
7
7 6
6
4
3
15 16 17 18
5
12
2 13
19
21
14
20
11
9
10
22 22
22 22
1 Skid 7 Left stay 13 Cartridge 19 Tray label*
2 Inner finisher 8 Upper pad 14 Eject guide* 20 Connecting plate
3 Protect sheet 9 Right spacer 15 Screw (M4x8*) 21 Installation guide
4 Main unit cover 10 Main tray 16 Screw (M4x10) 22 Hinge
5 Outer case 11 Inner pad 17 Screw (M4x8*)
6 Right stay 12 Ground plate* 18 Connector cover*
2-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
28 11
27
14 13
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
15 20
12 10
7
17
19
9
16 6 5 30
31
30 4
18
32 3
2-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Optional unit installation
*:120V/230V only
2-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
3 Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the SD card cover (c).
b c
a
b
4 Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
b
a
2-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
(2) Hard disk (HD-12): (High-end model, 25/35 ppm model (120V) standard)
1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
2 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding to the direction of the arrow.
Important
Check if two gaskets (b) are affixed to the hard disk mounting plate (a) before installing it.
a
b
2-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
4 Latch two hooks (b) onto the aperture (c) and attach the hard disk (e) with four screws (d)(M3x8).
c
b b
a
d
d
d
e
d
5 Connect two connectors (a) of the hard disk to two connectors (b) of the main PWB.
6 Fix the wire (c) with two wire saddle (d) and four wire stopper (d).
b
a
b
a
d
e
c
d
7 Reattach the parts to the original position.
• Formatting will start automatically at the first start-up when new HDD is installed.
• In case that Fax box has data, the memory LED blinks because of forming a preview image into the HDD after
restart.
2-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
2 Input "024" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
3 Select [Format].
4 Select [Full].
5 Select [Execute].
7 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
• Formatting HDD is required at first time for the new optional HDD.
Formatting will delete all existing data on the HDD.
2-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
2 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
3 Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4 Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8) that removed in step 2.
a
a
b
2-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• PWB unit 1 pc
• Screw (M3x6) 1 pc
1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
2 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding to the direction of the arrow.
5 Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
2-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
6 Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
7 Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
a
a
b
c e
d
f
9 Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8).
2-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
10Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c) (M3x10).
2-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Tray stay 1 pc
• Tray cover 1 pc
• Sheet 2
pcs
• Pins 2
pcs
• Nut M4 2 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
4 Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
2-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
5 Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6 Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c) (M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
7 Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
8 Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
2-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
9 Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a) (M4×8).
a
c
10Attach the tray lower cover (a).
B B
A
B B
b
b
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
2-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Numeric Keypad 1 pc
NK-7120 (1903T00UN0)
NK-7130 (1903T00US0)
Accessories
• Numeric Keypad 1 pc
• Screw (M3x8) 2 pc
• Label 1 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) from the operation unit (a).
3 Release two hooks (c), and then remove the operation unit lid (d) in the direction of the arrow.
a c d
2-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
4 Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
5 Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two
screws (d) (M3x8).
c
b
a
a
d
6 Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) that
removed in step 2.
b a c
2-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Important
Check if shape of label and position are same and affix the label.
2-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Label 1 pc
• Sponge (302N40446*) 2 pc
A and B is a pair.
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
3 Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) and pull it to the front side then remove four
lower hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow then take it away.
2
a
d
2-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
6 Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
7 Affix two sponges (b) and a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to holder (a) on the main unit.
a
b
c
c d
d
*1: 100V only
9 Connect the USB connector (b) to the lower USB interface slot (c).
10Bundle the extra part of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (f) of the main unit.
c
e
b
c
d
a b
2-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Important
Pay attention the direction of USB connector.
11Insert the upper eject cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a) (M3×8).
• Align the upper eject cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
12Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
13Attach the IC card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and then four latch lower hooks (e) by rotate it.
Reattach the ISU front right cover in the original position.
2-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Upper lid 1 pc
• Lower lid 1 pc
• Hook-and-loop fastener 2
pair
s
• Binding band 1 pc
2-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws (a)
(M3x8).
• Align them with each other at the mark B.
a
a
a
a
c
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
4 Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
2-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
5 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
6 Remove two screws (d) (M3x8) of the ISU left cover (c).
7 Lift up the left side of the ISU rear cover (a) and remove the ISU left cover (c).
d c
d
8 Pull up the operation unit (a).
9 Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower
hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
2-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
12Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
13Remove the screw (a) (M3x8).
14Release the hook (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b), and then remove the keyboard cover (d) by sliding it.
a
d
c
15Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook
(c) to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e) (M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
2-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
16Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b) (M4x8).
b
b
a
17Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d) (M3x8, black).
• Attach it aligning the hooks to the punch mark B.
b c b
a
d
18Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting
plate (c) and slide it to the rear.
19Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
2-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
20Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws (a)
(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
21Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
22Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a) (M3x8 Black).
b a
c
2-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
23Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
24Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener (b) and press it to fix.
25Connect the USB connector (c) to the upper USB interface slot (d).
d
c
d
c
a b
Important
Pay attention the direction of USB connector.
26Bundle the extra cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
2-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
• In case that the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the card reader from the hook
(c) of the main unit. Bundle two of the extra USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
c
b
27Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
28Insert the upper eject cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a) (M3×8).
• Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
2-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
29Latch six upper hooks (b) and then four latch lower hooks (e) by rotate it. Reattach the ISU front right cover in
the original position.
30Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws (d)
(M3×8).
31Reattach the screw (b) (M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
2-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
32Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a) (M3x8).
b
2-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Handset (1909AG9JP0) 1 pc
Accessories
• Handset 1 pc
• Handset holder 1 pc
• Protection cover*1 1 pc
• Pins 2
pcs
• Telephone wire 1 pc
• Modular cord 1 pc
• Nut M4 2 pc
Accessories
• Tray stay 1 pc
• Tray cover 1 pc
• Sheet*1 2
pcs
• Pins 2
pcs
• Nut M4 2 pc
2-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
4 Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
5 Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6 Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c) (M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
7 Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
2-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
8 Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
9 Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
2-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
10Remove two pins (b) and two nuts (c) from the handset mounting plate (a).
11Secure the original tray (d) with two pins and two nuts in step 10.
b
b
A
A
B
A A
a B
A
B
c
d
c
12Put two catches (c) at the backside of the handset holder (b) into two pins (a) and slide it toward you to fix it on
the document tray (d).
c
B
A
b A
A
B
A B
A
B
a B
2-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
13Cut the separator cover (b) of the tray lower cover (a) with pliers, etc.
a
14Attach the tray lower cover (a).
A A
B B
A A
B B
b
b
16Affix the sheet (b) on the left side of document table (a).
a
b
A
A
B
B A
A
B
B
2-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
17Connect the telephone wire (a) to the handset (b) and handset holder (c).
b
B
A
19Connect one end of the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the machine right side (c).
a b
c
2-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
2-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
4 Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
b
e
b
d
6 Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
7 Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
9 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
• The setting works after exit maintenance mode and turn off and on.
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is still supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Wire saddles 4 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
b
2-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
4 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
5 Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles
(d).
• Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
8 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Wire saddles 4 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
2-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
5 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
6 Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles
(d).
b
c
b
10Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Wire saddles 4
pcs
• Edge saddle 1 pc
2 Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
2-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
5 Release four pins (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
6 Pass the heater cassette cable (a) through the aperture.
7 Insert the hook (d) of the cassette heater set (c) into two grooves (e) and secure it with two screws (M3×8) (f).
de
a
d
e
b
f
2-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
8 Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9 Attach two wire saddles (d) and the edge saddles (e) and secure the wire.
e
c
a
d
a
c
12 Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13Attach the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d) (M3×8).
c
d
a
2-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
14Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit side paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire
(d).
a b
15Reattach the parts in the original position.
16Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Vender wire 1 pc 1 pc
• Vender base 1 pc 1 pc
• Screws (M4x6) 4 pc 4 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a) (M4x6).
c
b
a
3 Remove the rear lower cover.
4 Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
5 Remove the cable stopper (d) securing the vendor relay cable (b).
a
b a
2-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
7 Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 4.
8 Connect the connector (d) of the vendor cable (a) to the connector (e) of the vendor relay cable.
e
a
b
c
9 Secure the vendor relay cable (b) at a cable stopper (a) which was removed.
10Remove the screw (a) and attach the ground terminal (b) of the vendor cable.
a
a
2-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
12Connect the signal wire of the coin vendor to the connector of the vendor wire.
13Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Vender wire 1 pc 1 pc
• Vender base 1 pc 1 pc
• Screws (M4x6) 4 pc 4 pc
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a) (M4x6).
c
b
a
3 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding to the direction of the arrow.
2-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
5 Push down the lower rear cover (c), release the upper side rib, and release the lower hook (d) while lifting it up
slightly opened. After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
1
c
d 3
6 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
7 Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
2-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
10Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the front side aperture (b) and widen it in the direction of the arrow to
release four hooks (d) and to remove the upper left cover (e).
a
d
e
d d
b
b
13Lift up three hooks (c) and release them. Then remove the lower left cover (b).
c
b
c c c
a
a
b
a
2-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
14Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
a
b a
15Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
16Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 5.
a
b
c
17Remove one screw (a) and attach to the earth terminal (b) of the vendor wire.
2-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
18Connect the connector (b) of the vendor relay wire (a) to the connector (d) (YC21) of the engine PWB (c).
a b
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16
d YC43
YS1 YC38
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
19Pass the vendor relay wire (a) through the wire saddle (b) and the edge saddle (c).
2-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
20Remove four wire stoppers (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
21Connect the connector (c) of the vendor relay wire to the vendor wire (d).
c a
22Remove wire stopper (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
2-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
28Connect the signal wire of the coin vendor to the connector of the vendor wire.
29Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
Accessories
• Tray base 1 pc
• paper guide A 1 pc
• paper guide B 1 pc
• paper guide C 1 pc
1 Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
2-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional equipment
4 Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
2-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
Note
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
Login with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
2-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
Note
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of
activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
2-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical Configuration
3Machine Design
3 - 1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view (Low-end model)
11
7 6 8
10
12
5
3
2
1 Cassette paper feed 5 Laser scanner unit 9 Transfer and separation section
section
6 Developer unit 10 Fuser section
2 MP paper feed section
7 Toner container 11 Exit and branch section
3 Paper conveying section
8 Drum unit 12 Duplex conveying section
4 Image scanner unit
3-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical Configuration
11
7 6 8
10
12
5 3
2
1 Cassette paper feed 5 Laser scanner unit 9 Transfer and separation section
section
6 Developer unit 10 Fuser section
2 MP paper feed section
7 Toner container 11 Exit and branch section
3 Paper conveying section
8 Drum unit 12 Duplex conveying section
4 Image scanner unit
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
2 3 1
3-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3
Paper path (option)
3-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3
Paper path (option)
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
2
Paper path (option)
4
Paper path (option)
3-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
4 3 2
3-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
5
6 9 8 7
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (optional)
3-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
3 - 3 Electric parts
(1) Electric parts layout
2
2
1 1
4
4
5 5
3
3
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Controlling the entire firmware to control the interface to the PC and network and image data process, etc.
(2-2) Engine PWB
High Model
Low Model
3-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
It controls the hardware such as high-voltage/bias output, the image scanner unit, and the paper conveying system.
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB
Output high voltage for main charger, developer and transfer bias.
Output the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer cleaning bias.
(2-5) Power supply PWB
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is changed to DC such as DC24V, and it controls the fuser heater.
3-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
(2-6) IH PWB
100-120V
220-240V
High Model
Low Model
This PWB controls LCD, LED indicators and keys on operation panel.
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
3-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
(3) PWBs
(3-1) Locations
9
19
18
17
16
12
Laser scanner unit 13
Drum unit
24 Main unit
14 28 15 1
23 26
22 8 2
21
30
3
10 29
27
11
25 7
4
20 31
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
1 Main PWB Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC and network
and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire hardware to control
operation section.
2 Engine PWB Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high voltage, bias output,
image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser temperature, etc.
3 Feed image PWB Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum units, developer
units, fuser drive section and exit drive section.
4 Feed drive PWB Relay circuit for engine PWB and paper feed/conveying drive section.
6 Power supply PWB Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to DC.
7 Transfer connect PWB Relay circuit for feed image PWB and transfer PWB.
8 Transfer high-voltage PWB Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer cleaning bias.
9 Transfer PWB Storing the drum information on EEPROM. Relay board the belt cleaning motor/
belt thermistor and feed image PWB.
10 Operation panel main PWB Relay board for the main PWB, the operation panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11 Operation panel sub PWB Board for LED indicator and the key switches.
16 Developer PWB K Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit.
17 Developer PWB M Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit.
18 Developer PWB C Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit.
19 Developer PWB Y Relay board for the electric parts inside developer unit.
20 Drum/Developer relay PWB Relay board for the feed image PWB and drum units/developer units.
21 Drum PWB K Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
information on EEPROM.
22 Drum PWB M Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
information on EEPROM.
23 Drum PWB C Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
information on EEPROM.
24 Drum PWB Y Relay board for the electric parts inside drum unit, and storing the drum
information on EEPROM.
25 Fuser PWB Relay board for the electric parts inside fuser unit, and storing the fuser
information on EEPROM.
30 KUIO relay PWB Relay board for the main PWB and FAX PWB.
3-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
9 Transfer PWB - -
(TR-8550) (302ND9315*)
12 APC PWB - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*)
(LK-8350) (302L79311*)
13 PD PWB - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*)
(LK-8350) (302L79311*)
15 CCD PWB - -
(PARTS ISU ASSY SP) (302V89301*)
16 Developer PWB K - -
(DV-8560K) (302V89302*) *1, *4
(DV-8560K (J)) (302V89J02*) *1, *3
(DV-8350K) (302L79301*) *2, *4
(DV-8350K (J)) (302L79J01*) *2, *3
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
17 Developer PWB M - -
(DV-8560M) (302V89303*) *1, *4
(DV-8560M (J)) (302V89J03*) *1, *3
(DV-8350M) (302L79302*) *2, *4
(DV-8350M (J)) (302L79J02*) *2, *3
18 Developer PWB C - -
(DV-8560C) (302V89304*) *1, *4
(DV-8560C (J)) (302V89J04*) *1, *3
(DV-8350C) (302L79303*) *2, *4
(DV-8350C (J)) (302L79J03*) *2, *3
19 Developer PWB Y - -
(DV-8560Y) (302V89305*) *1, *4
(DV-8560Y (J)) (302V89J05*) *1, *3
(DV-8350Y) (302L79304*) *2, *4
(DV-8350Y (J)) (302L79J04*) *2, *3
20 Drum/Developer relay PWB PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT ASSY SP 302ND9407* *1
PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT ASSY SP 302L79403* *2
21 Drum PWB K - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
22 Drum PWB M - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
23 Drum PWB C - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
24 Drum PWB Y - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
25 Fuser PWB - -
(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
*1: High-end model, *2: Low-end model, *3: 100V *4: 120V, 220V-240V, *5: 220V-240V, *6: 100V, 120V
3-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
30
38
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
Main unit
Fuser unit 28 29 65 64 15 63 62 14
IH unit 33
43
44
45
52
50
42
56
26 11
32 41 40 46 49
48 27 31
66
55 50
34 58 37 16
7 9
51 4
60 20
17 53
35
61 1
8 3
39 12
57
6
5 2 36 54
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
59 10 18 21 13 19
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
3 Lower paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 1.
4 Upper paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 1.
5 Lower paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 2.
6 Upper paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 2.
15 Home position sensor Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.
22 T/C sensor K Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Black)
23 T/C sensor M Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Magenta)
24 T/C sensor Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Cyan)
25 T/C sensor Y Detecting the toner concentration in the developer unit and store
information on EEPROM (Yellow)
26 Toner level sensor K Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Black)
27 Toner level sensor M Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Magenta)
28 Toner level sensor C Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Cyan)
29 Toner level sensor Y Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Yellow)
3-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
35 Lift upper limit sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the cassette
1.
36 Lift upper limit sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the cassette
2.
37 Registration sensor Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.
40 Fuser jam sensor Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.
48 Lower exit full sensor Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
49 Upper exit full sensor Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
52 Original size timing sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
55 Power switch Turning on and off for the main, engine and operation panel PWB, etc.
57 Right cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the right cover open.
*1: High-end model, *2: Low-end model, *3: 100V *4: 120V, 220V-240V, *5: 220V-240V, *6: 100V, 120V
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
21 MP paper width sensor PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR ASSY SP 303R39405*
22 T/C sensor K - -
(DV-8560K) (302V89302*) *1, *4
(DV-8560K (J)) (302V89J02*) *1, *3
(DV-8350K) (302L79301*) *2, *4
(DV-8350K (J)) (302L79J01*) *2, *3
23 T/C sensor M - -
(DV-8560M) (302V89303*) *1, *4
(DV-8560M (J)) (302V89J03*) *1, *3
(DV-8350M) (302L79302*) *2, *4
(DV-8350M (J)) (302L79J02*) *2, *3
24 T/C sensor C - -
(DV-8560C) (302V89304*) *1, *4
(DV-8560C (J)) (302V89J04*) *1, *3
(DV-8350C) (302L79303*) *2, *4
(DV-8350C (J)) (302L79J03*) *2, *3
3-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
25 T/C sensor Y - -
(DV-8560Y) (302V89305*) *1, *4
(DV-8560Y (J)) (302V89J05*) *1, *3
(DV-8350Y) (302L79304*) *2, *4
(DV-8350Y (J)) (302L79J04*) *2, *3
30 Belt thermistor - -
(TR-8550) (302ND9315*)
38 LSU thermistor - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*) *1
(LK-8350) (302L79311*) *2
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
*1: High-end model, *2: Low-end model, *3: 100V *4: 120V, 220V-240V, *5: 220V-240V, *6: 100V, 120V
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
(5) Motors
(5-1) Locations
Developer unit
21 20 Primary transfer unit
22
23
3
11 12
10 8
9 19
Fuser unit
28
IH unit 46
Main unit
1
2
47 41
14 24
39 45 30
38 6
27 25
26 18
37 13
42 40
43 17
44
34 33 32 31 36 7 29 16 15 35
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
3-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
5 Belt cleaning motor Driving the primary transfer belt cleaning roller.
18 Developer K/Transfer belt motor Driving the developer unit K and the transfer belt.
36 Power supply fan motor Cooling the power supply PWB and high-voltage PWB.
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
1 IH core motor *1 - -
(FK-8595IH) (302ND9309*) *6
(FK-8590IH) (302ND9310*) *5
3 Polygon motor - -
(LK-8550) (302ND9313*) *1
(LK-8350) (302L79311*) *2
9 Toner motor K - -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP) (302ND9419*) *1
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*) *2
10 Toner motor M - -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP) (302ND9419*) *1
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*) *2
11 Toner motor C - -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP) (302ND9419*) *1
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*) *2
3-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
12 Toner motor Y - -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP) (302ND9419*) *1
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*) *2
20 Vibration motor K *1 - -
(DV-8560K) (302V89302*) *4
(DV-8560K (J)) (302V89J02*) *3
21 Vibration motor M *1 - -
(DV-8560M) (302V89303*) *4
(DV-8560M (J)) (302V89J03*) *3
22 Vibration motor C *1 - -
(DV-8560C) (302V89304*) *4
(DV-8560C (J)) (302V89J04*) *3
23 Vibration motor Y *1 - -
(DV-8560Y) (302V89305*) *4
(DV-8560Y (J)) (302V89J05*) *3
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
35 Fuser edge fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY SP 302ND9458*
42 Vibration motor K *1 -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*)
43 Vibration motor M *1 -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*)
44 Vibration motor C *1 -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*)
45 Vibration motor Y *1 -
(PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP) (302L79407*)
*1: High-end model, *2: Low-end model, *3: 100V *4: 120V, 220V-240V, *5: 220V-240V, *6: 100V, 120V
3-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
(6) Others
(6-1) Locations
22 21 20 19
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
18,25 15 16 24 17
Main unit
Fuser unit
IH unit
23 14 7
13
12 9
11 1
29
28 2
27 3
26
10
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
4 Registration clutch Controlling the secondary paper feeding from the cassette.
5 Paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette 1.
6 Paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette 2.
3-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
7 Developer clutch - -
(DR-8560) (302V89306*) *1
(DR-8360) (302VH9303*) *2
19 Eraser K - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
20 Eraser M - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
21 Eraser C - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
22 Eraser Y - -
(DK-8550) (302ND9307*) *1
(DK-8350) (302L79305*) *2
23 Fuser thermostat - -
(FK-8550) (302ND9308*) *1, *4
(FK-8560) (302ND9319*) *1, *3
(FK-8350) (302L79306*) *2
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
*1: High-end model, *2: Low-end model, *3: 100V *4: 120V, 220V-240V
3-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
1 DP PWB Relay board for the engine PWB and the DP electric parts.
2 DP top cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the top cover open.
3 DP open/close sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
5 DP original width sensor Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6 DP original length sensor Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7 DP paper feed sensor Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor.
10 DP branch sensor Detecting the position of the flap in the document processor.
12 DP lift upper limit sensor Detecting the upper limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
13 DP lift lower limit sensor Detecting the lower limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
16 DP paper feed motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
17 DP conveying motor Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
19 DP reversing motor Driving the original switchback section in the document processor.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
5 DP original width sensor PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR ASSY SP 303R39405*
3-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
1 DP PWB Relay board for the engine PWB and the DP electric parts.
2 DP top cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the top cover open.
3 DP open/close sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
5 DP original width sensor Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6 DP original length sensor Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7 DP paper feed sensor Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Front
page)
9 DP backside timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Back page)
11 DP lift upper limit sensor Detecting the upper limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
12 DP lift lower limit sensor Detecting the lower limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
14 DPSHD PWB Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
17 DP paper feed motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
18 DP registration motor Driving the original registration section in the document processor.
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
19 DP conveying motor Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
20 DP exit motor Driving the original eject section in the document processor.
22 DPCIS fan motor Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document processor (DP-
7120)
3-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
14
9
7 4 1
8 10
15 5
3
6
1 DP PWB Relay board for the engine PWB and the DP electric parts.
2 DP top cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the top cover open.
3 DP open/close sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
5 DP original width sensor Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6 DP original length sensor Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7 DP paper feed sensor Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor.
10 DP branch sensor Detecting the position of the flap in the document processor.
11 DP paper feed motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
13 DP paper feed clutch Controlling drive of the original primary feed section in the document
processor.
14 DP registration clutch Controlling drive of the original registration roller in the document processor.
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8 24
22
23
4 5
13 6
3
10
1 DP PWB Relay board for the engine PWB and the DP electric parts.
2 DP top cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply when the top cover open.
3 DP open/close sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
5 DP original width sensor Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6 DP original length sensor Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7 DP paper feed sensor Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8 DP timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Front
page)
9 DP backside timing sensor Detecting scan timing of the original in the document processor. (Back page)
11 DP lift upper limit sensor Detecting the upper limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
12 DP lift lower limit sensor Detecting the lower limit of bottom plate in the document processor.
14 DPSHD PWB Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
17 DP paper feed motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
18 DP registration motor Driving the original registration section in the document processor.
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
19 DP conveying motor Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
20 DP exit motor Driving the original eject section in the document processor.
22 DPCIS fan motor Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document processor (DP-
7120)
3-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
5 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cassette.
6 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cassette.
7 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cassette.
8 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cassette.
9 PF paper width switch 1 Detecting the paper width in the upper cassette.
10 PF paper width switch 2 Detecting the paper width in the lower cassette.
11 PF paper length switch 1 Detecting the paper length and upper cassette.
12 PF paper length switch 2 Detecting the paper length and lower cassette.
15 PF conveying sensor 1 Detecting paper jam at the upper paper conveying section.
16 PF conveying sensor 2 Detecting paper jam at the lower paper conveying section.
17 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the upper cassette.
18 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the lower cassette.
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
22 PF paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the upper cassette.
23 PF paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the lower cassette.
24 PF conveying clutch 1 Controlling the paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
25 PF conveying clutch 2 Controlling the paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
3-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8 17
10 24 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
5 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
6 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the right cassette.
7 Upper PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
8 Lower PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the left cassette.
11 PF horizontal conveying sensor Detecting paper jam at the horizontal paper conveying section.
12 PF vertical conveying sensor Detecting paper jam at the vertical paper conveying section.
13 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the right cassette.
14 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the left cassette.
18 Right PF paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the right cassette.
19 Left PF paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the left cassette.
3-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
8
1
7
11
3
6
4
13
3 Upper PF paper gauge sensor Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
4 Lower PF paper gauge sensor Detecting the level of the remaining paper in the cassette.
5 PF lift upper limit sensor Detecting the upper limit of the bottom plate in the cassette.
6 PF lift upper limit sensor Detecting the lower limit of the bottom plate in the cassette.
9 PF paper feed clutch Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette.
3-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
3 DF front cover switch Shutoff 24V power supply when the front cover open, interlock switch.
5 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting home position of the DF front adjusting plate.
6 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting home position of the DF rear adjusting plate.
10 DF paper press sensor 1 Detecting pressure for the bundle eject paper (Upper limit).
11 DF paper press sensor 2 Detecting pressure for the bundle eject paper (Lower limit).
3-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
26 DF connection sensor Detect connection with the main unit and DF (connection detection).
3-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
2 6
3 1
7
9 10 4
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
4 PH dust tank full sensor (Emit) Detecting the punch dust tank full.
5 PH dust tank full sensor Detecting the punch dust tank full.
(Receipt)
6 PH entry sensor Detecting paper at the entry section.
3-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
7
6
1
2 3
3-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25 13
3 40 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
3-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
21 DF tray sensor 5 Detecting the exit tray lower limit (with BF unit).
3-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
47 DF exit fan motor 1 Cooling the eject paper. (Rear) (Not connected)
48 DF exit fan motor 2 Cooling the eject paper. (Front) (Not connected)
49 DF exit fan motor 3 Cooling the eject paper. (Middle) (Not connected)
3-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
26
24
9
11 22
4
14 23
19
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
3-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
(13)Mailbox (MT-730(B))
(13-1) Locations
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
3-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
5 Punch dust tank full sensor Detecting the punch dust tank full.
3-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14
4 BF paper entry sensor Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
3-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
4 PH PWB (Punch unit) Controlling the electric parts of the punch unit.
3-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
18
17
19
16 8
21
30 5
22
20 31
6
3 35
7 9
25 34 28
10
15 33 1
4 29
2 23
32
27 11
26
14 36
37
13
24 12
3-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
17 18 7 30 31 2 22 21 23 28 29 1
19,20
25
6
8
16 3
15 4,5
32
35
33
34
9
27
10
14
24
36
26
11
37
13
12
3-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
4 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting the adjusting DF plate front home position.
5 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting the adjusting DF plate rear home position.
13 DF tray sensor 5 Detecting the exit tray lower limit (when the folding unit is installed).
15 DF tray upper surface sensor 1 Detecting paper surface on the DF main tray (Emit).
16 DF tray upper surface sensor 2 Detecting paper surface on the DF main tray (Receptor).
19 DF rear shift HP sensor Detecting home position of the rear shift plate.
20 DF front shift HP sensor Detecting home position of the front shift plate.
29 DF Drum timing (Relief path) Paper stop timing sensor in relief drum section.
sensor.
30 DF trail press guide HP sensor. Detect home position of trail press guide.
34 DF exit support guide HP sensor. Detect home position of paper support guide.
35 DF exit paper press sensor 2 Detect home position of exit paper press.
3-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
3-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
(16-5) Motors
15 4 3 8
29
9 14
32
31
11 2
30 16
10 1
6
27
26 7
13
23 21
24 17
25 22
5 19
28 12
18
20
9 10/11 23 8 14
4
1
3
24
15 2
16 7
5/6
21/22
13
12
17
18 19
20
3-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
15 DF trail press guide motor. Drive vertical motion of trail press guide.
23 DF withdraw pressure release motor Drive vertical motion of paper withdraw guide.
3-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
12 BF staple motor - -
PARTS STAPLER EH1200 (SP) 303S89412*
3-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
1
2
3
4
4 DF exit switching solenoid Change the position where get exit switch enable in stapling.
3-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
10 11 12 8 2
7
9
6 4 13 5 1 3
3-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
6 BF side registration motor 1 Detecting home position of the BF lower side registration guide.
7 DF side registration motor 2 Detecting home position of the BF upper side registration guide.
3-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
4 2 13 11 6 8
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
1 13 10 2 3 11 8 6
9 7 5 4 14
3-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
7 BF side registration sensor 1 Detecting lower side registration guide home position.
8 BF side registration sensor 2 Detecting upper side registration guide home position.
11 BF paper entry sensor Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
12 Fuser pressure release sensor Detect home position of the exit pressure release.
3-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
2/3
3-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
3 - 5 Driving system
(1) Drive configuration
(1) Paper feed/conveying section (4) Developer K/Transfer belt (6) Toner supply drive unit
motor
2 MP paper feed roller 2 Primary transfer belt drive roller 20 Toner motor C
3 Developer roller Y *1
(3) Drum CMY drive 1 Developer sleeve roller M *2 (8) Container drive
2 Drum C
3 Drum Y
3-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Middle clutch
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
3-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
MP drive
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
3-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
Drum drive
Drum motor K
Drum K
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum M
Drum C
Drum Y
Drum unit K
Drum unit M
Drum unit C
Drum unit Y
3-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
⌧ീࣂࢫ
Developer roller Y
Developer roller C
Developer roller M
Developer roller K
⌧ീ࣮ࣔࢱ࣮YC
Developer motor CMY
Developer clutch
Developer unit K
Developer unit M
Developer unit C
Developer unit Y
3-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
⌧ീࣂࢫ
Developer sleeve roller Y
Developer K ࣋ࣝࢺ㞳㛫࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
/ Transfer belt motor
Developer clutch
Developer unit K
Developer unit M
Developer unit C
Developer unit Y
3-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
Transfer drive
3-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
Fuser motor
DU clutch 2
DU clutch 1
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
3-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
Fuser motor
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU registration roller
IH core motor
3-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
11 C
10
13 14 15 16
9 D
12
7 8
B
5 6
2
3
A
4
3-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
Low model
High model
3-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Driving system
3-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
3 - 6 Mechanical construction
(1) Paper feed/Conveying section
The paper feed/Conveying section consist of the cassette paper feed section, the MP tray paper feed section, and the
paper conveying section where convey the paper to the transfer and separate section.
13
12 5 1
23
6
8 14
7
4
12
5
9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
1. Paper feed roller 6. Friction pad 11. Width guide release lever
2. Pickup roller 7. Lift plate 12. Actuator (Paper sensor)
3. Pickup holder 8. Paper width guides 13. Vertical conveying roller
4. Retard roller 9. Paper length guide 14. Vertical conveying pulley
5. Retard holder 10. Cassette base
3-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU clutch 2 YC7-A3
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
3-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
3 1 6 9 5
2 11
10
9
1
4
5 7
8
11
2 6 12
9 3
3-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP clutch YC7-A5
3-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
4 5
3
6
7
2
1
2
1
6
3
3-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
Paper feed motor YC11-2
YC11-3
YC11-4
DU sensor 2 YC7-B9
3-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
8 5 9 17 3 6 1 12
8 16 7 15 2
5 9
4 14
8 7
3
13
9
10
11 6
1
2
12
3-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor YC16-A4
YC16-A5
Engine PWB
LED PWB
3-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4
5 1 2 6 6 6 3 6
7
5 8
9
12
11 13 14
4 10
1
2
6
3
6
3-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
(Low-end model)
Engine PWB
YC9 YC27
YC1 YC3
LSU thermistor YC7-1
PD PWD YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
(High-end model)
Engine PWB
YC9 YC10 YC27
PD PWD YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
3-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
(Low-end model)
5 1 7(Y) 5 1 7(C) 5 1 7(M) 5 1 7(K)
4
6
3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2
4 6
3
3-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias YC34
Main high voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor CMY
YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K/
YC24-15
Transfer belt motor
YC24-16
YC24-17
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
T/C sensor K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Developer PWB K YC2
T/C sensor C
T/C sensor Y
3-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
(High-end model)
(Y) (C) (M) K
6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1
5 7 4 3 57 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3
1
5 7
4
3-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias YC34
Main high voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor CMY YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer K/
YC24-15
Transfer belt motor
YC24-16
YC24-17
T/C sensor K
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Vibration motor
Developer
⌧ീᇶᯈBK PWB K YC2
T/C sensor C
Vibration motor
T/C sensor Y
Vibration motor
3-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
3
2
1
6
3-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
Main high voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor CMY
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor K
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum/Developer
Eraser K relay PWB
Drum PWB K YC10
Eraser M
Eraser C
Eraser Y
3-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
(High-end model)
3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (B)
568 568 568 568
1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7
3 8
2
1
5
7
3-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage
Main high voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor CMY
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
Drum motor K YC24-2
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum/Developer
Eraser K
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮ relay PWB
Drum PWB K
⌧ീᇶᯈBK YC10
Drum heater
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK YC6
Eraser M
Eraser C
Eraser Y
3-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
10 9 4 2 12 12 12 12
(Y) (C) (M) (K)
2 3
9
8
4
7
1
11
3-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC34
Transfer high-voltage
Transfer bias
PWB
Engine PWB
YC23-1
Belt release motor
YC23-2
YC24-13
Developer K / YC24-14
Transfer belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
3-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
3 1 4
3 4
1. Secondary transfer roller
2. Discharger needle
3. Transfer front guide
4. Transfer spring
3-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
3-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
9 8
7
6
4
3
2 5
13 11
12
1
1
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
1. Cooling the fuser belt 6. Press roller separation 11. Fuser frame
edge.
2. IH core 7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 12. Fuser front guide
3. Fuser thermistor 8. Fuser eject roller 13. Discharger needle
4. Separator 9. Fuser exit sub roller
5. Press roller 10. Pressure switching cam
3-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC2-1 YC10-2
Fuser motor
YC3-1 YC10-3
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
FSR-1 Feed drive PWB
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
YC22
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
3-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
(High-end model)
9 8
7
6
2 4
3
5
11
13 12
1
1
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
1. Fuser belt 6. Press roller separation 11. Fuser frame
2. IH core 7. Actuator (Fuser sensor) 12. Fuser front guide
3. Fuser thermistor 8. Fuser eject roller 13. Discharger needle
4. Separator 9. Fuser exit sub roller
5. Press roller 10. Pressure switching cam
3-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high voltage Fuser pressure release motor
YC10-8
PWB
Feed drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Feed image PWB
YC22
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
3-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
2
9 8
7
5
3 6
10
4
9
11
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
1. Upper eject roller 5. Exit conveying roller 9. Actuator (Exit paper full sensor)
2. Upper exit pulley 6. Exit conveying pulley 10. Exit feedshift guide
3. Lower exit roller 7. Switching guide 11. Exit guide pulley
4. Lower exit pulley 8. Switching guide pulley 12. Actuator (Exit switching sensor)
3-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Exit reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
YC17-1A5
Upper exit solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower exit solenoid
YC17-A13
3-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
1 Have the eject lever (c) on the eject actuator longer if the leading edge of paper (b) get stuck with trailing edge
(a) of the ejected paper.
2 The lever pushes down the trailing edge (a) of eject paper to prevent from hitting by the leading edge of next
paper (b).
In case of stretching the eject level lever
3-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
1
9
2
12
3
4
6
5
4
11
10
7
8
9
1
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
3-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
3-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
15
5
12
13
15
1
4
5
2
9 10 8 7 14 3
8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
3-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
8
9 7
14
2
12
13
4
8 1
6
11
3-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
PF PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length sensor 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
YC5-11
PF paper length sensor 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
3-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
12 3
5 12 3 14
5
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
11
9 11 1
2
8 12
10
10
4
6
7
3-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF PWB
3-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
10
4
11
5
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
3-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
3-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
10 4 1 8
9 6
2
13
12
11
8
1
4
5
8
9 12
3-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
6 8 9
14
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
3-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP exit sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
3-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
3-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
11 10 2
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
4 5
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
3-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
32 1
13
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
3-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
DPSHD PWB
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
3-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
11
2
14 9
13
12 7
4
5
1
8 6
9 10
15
3-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
12
13
1 5 7 8 11
2 4 6 9 10
7
5
6
3
7
2 1
12
11
8 10
9 13
3-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor
YC9-3
YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
DP feedshift motor
YC9-7
YC9-8
DP PWB
YC4-1
DP original width sensor YC4-2
YC4-4
3-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
2
The second side of original is 3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is 1
conveyed to the DP switchback tray.
DP switchback tray
3-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
13
5 4 6 8 15 14 10 12
7 9 11
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
3-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
32 1
13
5 4 6 8 15 14 10 12
7 9 11
2
3
6 4
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
3-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
DPSHD PWB
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP exit motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
3-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
13
14
2
1
15 17 6 16
18 13
8
7
14
4
9
2 1
16
3-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC13-2
DF Paper press solenoid
YC13-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF PWB
Figure 6-3-1
3-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
2 The DF bundle exit unit (b) and the DF upper guide (c) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the DF
middle roller (a). Then, the DF exit roller (d) is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the DF middle tray (e).
a
d b
3 Then, the DF upper guide (a) ascends and the DF bundle eject unit (b) ascends by the DF eject release motor
drive. By rotating the DF paddles(c), paper is conveyed to the DF middle tray (d). The DF side registration
motor 1, 2 (e) drive the DF side registration guides (f) to adjust paper.
b a
f c
3-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
5 The DF bundle exit unit (b) descends and The DF upper guide (c) descends when the paper trailing edge
passes the DF middle roller (a). Then, by rotating the DF exit roller (d) and the DF paddles (e) , paper is
conveyed to the DF middle tray (f). Paper is adjusted as well as the 1st sheet.
a
d b
c e
6 As completing to adjust the last sheet to bundle, the DF bundle eject unit (a) descends and by rotating the DF
eject roller (b), the paper bundle (c) is ejected to the DF eject tray (d).
a
b
3-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
6
11
10
5 4
3 2
1
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
3-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF exit motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
DF paper entry motor
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF PWB
a
e
d
b
3-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
12
3
20
5
18
19
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
3-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
DF exit release motor
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
DF feedshift solenoid 1
YC18-7
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
DF feedshift solenoid 2
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4
DF staple unit
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
DF side registration motor 1
YC15-11 / YC15-12
3-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1 The feed-shift guide 1 (b) is activated by the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 (a) and the conveying path for the
conveyed paper is switched. The 1st paper of the next group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
2 Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
b
c
3 When the 3rd paper of the next group is conveyed into the relief drum, it is conveyed to the finishing section (a)
with the 1st and 2nd paper. Then, the paper conveying path is switched by the feed-shift guide 1 (b).
3-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
4 The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) activates the feedshift guide 2 (c) and it switches the paper conveying path to
convey paper to the folding unit (a).
3-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1st sheet
1 By rotating the middle roller (a), paper is conveyed to the process section.
Paper is conveyed to the DF tray A (c) by the DF tray A eject roller (b).
c
b
2 The conveying guide (d) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the middle roller (a). Then, the DF tray
A eject roller (b) is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the adjusting tray (e).
d
b e
3 Then, the paper conveying guide (d) ascends and the bundle eject unit (g) ascends by the DF eject release
motor (f) drive.
By rotating the DF tray A exit roller (b) and adjusting paddles (h), paper is conveyed to the adjusting tray (i).
The DF side registration motor 1, 2 (j) drive the adjusting guides (k) to adjust paper.
g f
k
h
d
b i
j
3-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
b
c
5 The conveying guide (d) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the DF middle roller (c). Then, by
rotating the paddles (e) and the adjusting paddles (f), paper is conveyed to the adjusting tray (g). Paper is
adjusted as well as the 1st sheet.
e f
c
d g
6 When adjusting the last paper of bundle is complete, the bundle eject unit (h) descends and the DF tray A eject
roller (i) rotates to eject the paper bundle to the DF tray A (j).
h
3-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
11
13,14
16
18
6
7
17
10
9
1
2
3-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF exit release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF paper entry motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF exit motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF PWB
DF staple relay PWB YC10
DF staple unit
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
3-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
d b
c
a
2 The conveying guide (e) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the middle roller (b). Then, the eject
roller (c) rotates reversely and paper is sent to the adjusting tray.
h g
c e
j
i k
3 Then, the conveying guide (e) ascends and the bundle eject unit (h) ascends by the DF eject release motor (g)
drive.
3-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
By rotating the exit roller (c) and adjusting paddles (i), paper is conveyed to the side (j) of the adjusting tray (f).
The DF side registration motor 1, 2 (k) drive the adjusting guides (l) to adjust paper.
h g
c e
j
i k
2nd sheet and after
4 By rotating the DF entry roller (c) and DF middle roller (d), 2nd paper (b) is conveyed to the process section as
the 1st sheet (a).
b d
5 The conveying guide (e) descends when the paper trailing edge passes the middle roller (d). Then, by rotating
the paddles (f) and the adjusting paddles (g), paper is conveyed to the adjusting tray (h). Paper is adjusted as
well as the 1st sheet.
f
d
e g
3-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
6 As completing to adjust the last sheet to bundle, the bundle eject unit (i) descends and by rotating the main
tray eject roller (j), the paper bundle is ejected to the DF main tray (k).
k
j
3-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
10
11
3
4
12
3 8
4
13
3 8
4
14 2 1
3 8
4
15
3 8
4
2 1
3 8
4
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
9
10
11
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
3-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
MT PWB
YC5-1
MT conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
YC3
YC7
DF PWB
3-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
b d
a e
3-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1
6
7
2
8
4
1
5
2
3-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC4-1
PH motor
YC4-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
PH slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
PH PWB
PH tank full sensor YC5-10
YC5-4
YC5-5
PH paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
YC5-2
PH solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF PWB
3-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
2 1
3
21 17 16
22 19 18 14 15
5 4
8
6 7
25
26 20
23
24 13 1211 10
1
2
18
21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 7
13 12
3-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration motor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
BF side registration motor 1
YC10-19/ YC10-20
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF PWB
3-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
2 The BF adjusting motor 1, 2 (f) drive and align t the paper side.
e a d
f c
c f
3 The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by driving the BF blade motor and let it go between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4 Center-folded paper is ejected to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF eject roller
(d).
c b
d a
3-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
Tri-folding
1 The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor 1, 2
as well as the center-folding operation.
2 After align the paper side, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and let it go between the BF right roller (b) and
BF left roller (c).
3 The BF feed-shift solenoid (d) activates the BF feed-shift guide (e) it switches the paper conveying path for the
paper from the BF right/left roller to convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
4 When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated in the space goes between the BF right
roller (a) and upper BF roller (b) to get the paper fold on the inside.
b
3-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
5 The BF conveying roller (b) and BF exit roller (c) convey the folded paper (a) to the BF tray (d).
c b
a
3-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
A B C
B
Z
A C
X Y
* If this adjustment is executed for bundled paper, Z section may be folded since there is little margin at the tri-folding
position (X, Y).
* Machine shipment setting (B)
Metric (A4): 100 to 102 mm
Inch (Letter): 95 to 96 mm
3-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
a
2 Open the upper folding unit cover (a) upward and remove two screws (b) to take the eject cover (c) away.
b
c
3-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
3 Loosen two screws (b) securing the adjuster plate (a) and move it.
b a b
e
d
• Raising the adjuster plate makes the width B decrease and lowering the adjuster makes increase the width.
(Scale: 1mm)
• When adjusting, fix it where the left and right scale are equal in reference to the scale (c).
Treatment 2
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting: Three Fold] to shift the tri-folding position (a) and to change the width A and
C. (Width of B no change.)
B
A C A C
Left Right
a a
Raise the set value to align the tri-folding to the left.
Lower the set value to align the tri-folding to the right.
3-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
5 9
6 2 10
3
1
10 5 4
1
3 2
6
7
3-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
e
b
3-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
18 11 12 13 9 8 7 6 4 1 2
10
3
16
17
8 3 1 2
3-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
11
10
[Block diagram]
DF PWB
DF staple unit
3-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
3-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
3-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1 The feed-shift guide 1 (b) is activated by the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 (a) and switch the paper path, then the
first paper of the next group goes to the relief drum (c).
2 Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group goes to the relief drum (c).
3 When the 3rd paper of the next group goes to the relief drum, it goes to the finishing section (a) with the 1st
and 2nd paper. Then, switch the paper path by the feed-shift guide 1 (b).
3-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
4 The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) activates the feedshift guide 2 (c) and switches the paper path to the folding
unit (a).
c b
3-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
2,3
4
5
3-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
DF tray upper
YC32-9
surface sensor 1
DF PWB
3-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
2 1
3
21 16 18
19 17 14 15
5 4
25 8
6
26 7
22
20
23
24 13 10
12 11
3-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
1
26
2
18
17
14
4
5
21 6
20
12
13
3-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical configuration (Optional)
[Block diagram]
YC11/ YC12
DF PWB
3-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance
4Maintenance
4 - 1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the power lamp
on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the disassembly.
Even after power off and unplug, some capacitors on power supply board may still have electro charge, so pay attention
not to touch those parts. In order to remove this charge, press [Power] key for 1 second.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to damage the
PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
4 - 2 Maintenance parts
(1) Maintenance kits
Main unit
(1-1) Low-end model
Name used in service Name used in parts list Qua Part No.
manual ntity
MK-8335A MK-8335A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702RL0UN3
• FUSER ASSY 1
• TRANSFER UNIT 1
• PULLEY FEED 2
• PULLEY PICKUP 2
• FILTER TOP 1
• DLP C UNIT 1
• DLP Y UNIT 1
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
• DLP K UNIT 1
• FUSER ASSY 1
• TRANSFER UNIT 1
• PULLEY FEED 2
• PULLEY PICKUP 2
• FILTER TOP 1
• DLP M UNIT 1
• DLP C UNIT 1
• DLP Y UNIT 1
4-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
(2-1) Maintenance modes that need to run after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Low-end model
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Replacing U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear)
settings
High-end Model
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Replacing U119 Drum unit initial settings
settings
*1: MK-8515A
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
High-end Model
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Replacing U119 Drum unit initial settings
settings
Developer unit
Low-end model
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Image U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib)
adjustment
High-end Model
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Replacing U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration)
settings
4-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
MC roller
Section Mode Maintenance item
Number
Replacing U930 Charging roller counter clear (Clear)
settings
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
1 Remove cassette.
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
a
b
d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
4-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
3 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the upper paper feed section of the main
unit (b).
4 Pinch the lock lever (d) and pull the primary paper feed unit (e) from the lower paper feed section of the main
unit (b).
a
e
5 Release hooks (a), and remove retard roller (b) from the bushing (c).
a
c d
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
7 Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary feed unit (a).
a
8 Release the hooks (a), and remove pickup pulley (b) and paper feed roller (c) from the bushing.
• Take pickup pulley (b) away lifting up it slightly.
c b
9 Attach the new paper feed roller.
Important
• When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller surface.
• After replacing with the new pickup roller and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a) to the position where it is aligned to
the triangle mark (b).
4-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
b
a
Notes for attaching
When installing the primary paper feed unit (a), align the protrusion (b) at the lower part of the primary feed unit to the
guide (c) and align the protrusion (d) at the upper part of the primary feed unit to the guide (e) of the main unit.
Reseat the primary paper feed unit in case that [Cassette xx error] comes up.
a
e
d
c b
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
3 Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
4-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
Important
When closing the inner cover (a), push the part A to the position where the lever (b) and covers are the same
level.
5 Check the sponge on the regist cleaner (a) and clean or replace it.
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Pinch the holder (a) and remove the MP feed roller (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
4-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Release hook (b) with flat head screwdriver and rotate MP feed roller holder (c) to the direction of arrow.
d
e c
c
b
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
Important
When replacing the new MP separation pulley or MP paper feed roller, take care not to touch the roller surface.
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP paper feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
a b
a
b
2 Open the front cover for maintenance while slightly opening the front cover.
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4 Push in the release lever (b) and grasp the handle (c), and then pull out the primary feed unit in the direction of
the arrow.
5 After that, hold the upper side handle (b) and detach the primary feed unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
6 Check the primary transfer unit (a) and clean or replace it.
a
b
d
c
Important
Take care not to hit the primary transfer belt to the inner cover (d) and front cover for maintenance (c).
4-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
b
B A
b
a
b
Important
When installing the primary transfer unit (a), hold the handle (f) by both hands and install the unit aligning the
hook (b) on the unit to rail (c) in main unit.
•
• Slide the unit straightforward touching the parts (A) and (B) that is both side of rib (d) on the upper front of
the unit. Otherwise, for example, install the unit holding release lever (e), the unit cannot be installed
straightforward. It may break connectors on both unit and main unit and cause service call below.
C1950 Primary transfer EEPROM error
C2840 Belt cleaning motor error
c
c
a d
a
b f
A B
b
e d
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
• ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Manual
• Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Release front/rear hooks (c) with holding transfer guide (a) and pushing front/rear the ribs of arm parts (b) to
the direction of arrow.
b
a c
d
b
c
b
c
3 Push the lock lever (b) toward the machine rear side.
4 Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock lever (b) in the direction of the arrow.
5 Detach the secondary transfer roller unit (d) while lifting up the machine front side.
6 Check the secondary transfer roller unit (d) and clean or replace it.
d
2
1
b
Execute the following setting after replacing the secondary transfer unit.
• Transfer counter clear (maintenance mode U127): Clear
• ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Auto
• Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)
4-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Release hooks (c) of the front/rear arm by holding up front/rear lever of the transfer guide and pick the transfer
guide (d) up.
b
c a
b
c
3 Push the lock lever (b) toward the machine rear side.
4 Release the hooks (c) and rotate the lock lever (b) in the direction of the arrow.
5 Detach the secondary transfer roller unit (d) while lifting up the machine front side.
6 Check the secondary transfer roller (d) and clean or replace it.
2
d
2
11
b
cc
Execute the following setting after replacing the secondary transfer unit.
• Transfer counter clear (maintenance mode U127): Clear
• ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
• Primary transfer unit initial setting (maintenance mode U469): Auto
• Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
4-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
a b
a
b
3 Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
Important
When closing the inner cover (a), push the part A to the position where the lever (b) and covers are the same
level.
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
5 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four drum units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
a b b b
b
Important
Slide the unit straightforward touching projection (a) on lower front of the unit.
Otherwise, the unit cannot be installed straightforward. It may break connectors on both unit and main unit and
cause service call below.
• C7901 Drum unit K EEPROM error
• C7902 Drum unit C EEPROM error
• C7903 Drum unit M EEPROM error
• C7904 Drum unit Y EEPROM error
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
Important
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the developer unit when installing the drum unit while the developer
unit is installed. Otherwise, it causes the drum damage.
4-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
8 Pull up the main charge roller unit (c) while pressing it and remove it from the drum unit (a) in the direction of
the arrow.
9 Check the main charge roller unit (c) and clean or replace it.
Important
1 Install the main charge roller unit (a) in the drum unit (c) while releasing the main charger roller
release lever (b).
2 Insert the main charger release lever (b) into the aperture and press down A part to check it clicks to
lock.
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
c
A
c
Important
Note when replacing the main charger roller unit, the shape of the roller edge is different between the low-end
model (b) and high-end model (c). Take care not to attach it wrongly.
b c
Execute the following setting after replacing the main charge roller.
• Main charger roller counter clear (maintenance mode U930): Clear
• ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
• Auto halftone adjustment (maintenance mode U410)
4-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
3 Open to pull left and right lever (b) of the inner cover (a).
b b
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four developer units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
b
b b
b
Important
Slide the unit straightforward touching projection (a) on lower front of the unit.
Otherwise, the unit cannot be installed straightforward. It may break connectors on both unit and main unit and
cause service call below.
• C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
• C7912 Developer unit C EEPROM error
• C7913 Developer unit M EEPROM error
• C7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM error
• Image failure with developer leaking
4-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
3 Open to pull left and right lever (b) of the inner cover (a).
b b
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four developer units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
b b b b
Important
Slide the unit straightforward touching projection (a) on lower front of the unit.
Otherwise, the unit cannot be installed straightforward. It may break connectors on both unit and main unit and
cause service call below.
• C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
• C7912 Developer unit C EEPROM error
• C7913 Developer unit M EEPROM error
• C7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM error
• Image failure with developer leaking
4-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
7 After inserting the developer unit (a), securely push the lock shaft (b).
• Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) when inserting the developer unit. Otherwise, it causes the drum
damage.
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
2 Release the hook (b) while pressing the left and right levers (a), detach the fuser unit (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
b
a
b a
4-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
b c
a
c
b
Important
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
• Back side lock failure
This causes drive failure at the rear side and comes up C6600 fuser belt rotation error.
• Front side lock failure
This causes the image squareness failure due to skew feed.
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
(6-2) Hight adjustment of fuser unit (Trail edge skew image adjustment)
P rinting direc
ction
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)
4-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
3 Release the hook (b) while pressing the left and right levers (a), detach the fuser unit (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
b
a
b a
4 Loosen 2 screws (f) for fixing the fuser positioning guide (g) on inner frame of the front side.
5 Lift up the fuser positioning guide (g) and move the fuser hight adjust lever (h) to either right or left.
Estimate amount of movement
• In case of front side short (Chart A): Move the fuser hight adjust lever (h) to the right side of main unit and
make the fuser positioning guide 1 pitch down. This makes front side about 0.4 mm shorter.
• In case of front side long (Chart B): Move the fuser hight adjust lever (h) to the left side of main unit and make
the fuser positioning guide 1 pitch up. This makes front side about 0.5 mm longer.
f
Machine left side
6 After adjustment, keep down fuser positioning guide (g) along with fuser hight adjust lever and secure 2
screws.
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
(7) Others
(7-1) Detaching and attaching filters.
Upper rear filter
1 Push lever (a) and remove upper rear filter cover (b) and filter (c).
2 Check the upper rear filter (c) and clean or replace it.
Rear filter
1 Push lever (d) and remove rear filter cover (e) and filter (f).
4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
a
b
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
4 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the upper stage of the paper feeder (b).
5 Pinch the lock lever (d) and pull the primary paper feed unit (e) from the lower stage of the paper feeder (b).
6 Release hooks (a), and remove retard pulley (b) from the bushing (c).
c d
4-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
8 Slide the feed cover (b) from the primary feed unit (a).
a
9 Release the hooks (a), and remove pickup pulley (b) and paper feed roller (c) from the bushing.
• Take pickup pulley (b) away lifting up it slightly.
c b
12After replacing with the new pickup roller and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a) to the position where it is
aligned to the triangle mark (b).
b
a
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
Important
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller
surface.
a e
d
c b
4-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
3 Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.
4 Pull out the left cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b).
b
a
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
5 Push both slider lock levers (b) to release lock and pull the left cassette (a) furthermore. (50 to 70 mm)
6 Pull out the right cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b).
a
7 Hold the handle (a) and pull out the PF conveying unit in the direction of the arrow.
4-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
c
b
d
a
9 Release hooks (b), and remove retard pulley (c) from the bushing (d).
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
10Release hooks (b), and remove pickup pulley (c) and paper feed roller (d) from the bushing.
c
b
Important
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller
surface.
4-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
2 Remove the screw (a) (M3x8) and detach the wire cover (b).
a
3 Disconnect the connector (b) of the main unit (a).
6 Slide the PF feed unit (f) frontward and remove it while rotating it by using the positioning shaft (g) as fulcrum.
a
d
f
e
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
7 Remove two stop rings A (b) from the PF paper feed shaft (a).
8 Remove two stop rings B (c) and slide the joint (d).
b
c b
9 Slide two bushings (b) at the both sides of the feed roller holder (a).
10Remove the feed roller holder (a) and spring (d) upward from the PF feed unit (c).
d b
a
4-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
3 Remove stop ring (c) from the PF retard roller shaft (b).
4 Pull out the spacer (d) from PF retard roller shaft and remove it.
• Take care not to fall the set pin, when removing the spacer.
c
6 Pull out the torque limiter (a) and PF retard roller (d) while pushing retard release lever (c), and remove it.
d
b a c
Important
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller
surface.
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
2 Pull the release lever (b) and open the fixing cover (c).
c
b
3 Rotating DP paper feed unit (a) and pull out it in the direction of the arrow.
4-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
2 Remove hooks (b) and remove the DP retard roller cover (c).
a
b c
3 Remove the stop ring (a), and remove the DP retard roller (b) and the torque limiter (c).
4 Check or replace the DP retard roller, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
b
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
b
a
b
4-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
5 Detach the front side stop ring from the DP feed belt shaft (a).
6 Slide the DP feed unit (c) frontward and remove it from the document processor (d)
d
c
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
3 Remove hooks (b) and remove the DP retard roller cover (c).
a
b
4 Remove the stop ring (a), and remove the DP retard roller (b) and the torque limiter (c).
a
c
b
4-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
2 Pulling release lever (a) and open the fixing cover (b).
3 Rotating DP paper feed unit (a) and pull out it in the direction of the arrow.
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Enhancement)
2 Remove hooks (b) and remove the DP retard roller cover (c).
a
b c
4 Check or replace the DP retard roller, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
2 Input "469" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
3 Select [Execute].
5 Select maintenance modes listed on the display from top to bottom and press [Start] key to return to
maintenance mode.
7 Press [Stop] key to get back to flow after finish each modes.
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
MK-8335A
MK-8335D MK-8335B
Start Start
MK-8515A MK-8335E
MK-8515B
U119 Setting the drum *1 U119 Setting the drum *1
(Execute) (Execute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density *1 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
(Normal Mode)
4-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
b c
d
4-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum pin (a).
5 Remove each one screw, remove the strap (c) from the front cover (a) and remove in the direction of the arrow.
b c
c
b
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
3 Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Release the hook (b) with a flat-blade screwdriver (a), remove the inner cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened and release the lower hook (c).
After that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
(1-6) Detaching and attaching the DP rear cover
1 If DP is installed, Open it.
4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Detach the LSU rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
(1-8) Detaching and attaching the left top cover/the rear left cover.
1 Remove two screw (a) (M3x8).
2 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Insert flat-head screwdriver (c) to the front side of aperture, spread the aperture in the direction of the arrow,
release four hooks (d) and remove the left top cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
8 Lift and remove four hooks (c) and remove left lower cover (b).
a
a
c
b
b
a
c c c c
(1-9) Detaching and attaching the right top cover
2 After removing the front rib (c), remove the right top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
(1-10) Detaching and attaching the rear right top cover, rear right bottom cover
1 Detach the rear top cover.
4 Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
5 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the right rear bottom cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
4-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Remove the stopper (c) of the fulcrum pin (b). Slide the arm (d) in the direction of the arrow and detach it from
the fulcrum pin (b).
c
b d
6 Release the wire (b) from the hook (c) and disconnect two connectors (d).
b
c
d
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
7 Remove the stopper (a), and slide the strap (b) then detach it from the pin (b).
9 Tilt up the front cover shaft (c). After that, slide it in the direction of the arrow
10Tilt up the back cover shaft (a). After that draw up in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
c
d
c d
4-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Detach the right cover assembly (a) in the direction of the arrow.
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Release two hooks (b) and remove the wire cover (c).
a
c
4-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
15Put flat screwdriver (h) to the fulcrums of the middle guide (a) and get the holes (b) out from pins (c).
16Rotate middle guide (a) to the direction (1) and pull up to the direction (2).
h
h
c
c
b a
f g
b
18Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.
b b a
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Remove the stopper (a) ,and slide the strap (b) and detach it from the pin (b).
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Open the front cover (a) and then open the front cover for maintenance (b) while grasping the upper left and
right part.
5 Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
4-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6 Pull out the regist cleaner (a) by holding the handle of it.
8 Detach the rear secondary transfer guide (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
b
9 Remove the middle conveying unit wire (a) from the connector (b).
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
10Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the middle conveying unit (b).
b
a
a
4-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
b
c d d
b
e e
11Loosen the LSU fixing pins (c) or spring (c) with a screwdriver (a) and remove them.
c
b
c
b
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
14Open the front cover.
16Insert flat-head screwdriver (c) to the front side of aperture and spread in the direction of the arrow to release
four hooks (d) and remove the left top cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
19Lift and remove four hooks (c) and remove left lower cover (b).
a
a
c
b
b
a
c c c c
20Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the LSU left stay (b).
b
a
a
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Low model
b
c
High model
b
b
a
23Check the laser scanner unit (a) and clean or replace it.
4-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
7 When measuring the size of two places A and B, if the difference of sizes is 1.5mm or less, it is the completion
of adjustment.
• If the difference of size is more than 1.5mm, proceed to the next step.
A B
9 Adjust the scale (b) for reference using the adjustment knob (a).
• In the measured value B<A, move the adjustment knob (a) to leftward.
• In the measured value A<B, move the adjustment knob (a) to rightward.
c
b
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Select [Manual].
3 Select [Print].
5 Execute the following adjustment if the gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale position is 2 scales or more for
each color.
CV-1 CV-1
CV-5 CV-5
Sample 1 Sample 2
6 Open the front cover slightly and open the front cover for maintenance.
a a a
b
a
4-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Select [Auto].
• Output the auto adjustment chart.
3 Select [Execute].
4 Drum unit initial setting (maintenance mode U119): Execute (High-end model only)
1 Input "119" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Select [Calib].
6 Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode (High-end model
only)
1 Input "412" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
4 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test chart and set as original.
6 Press [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test chart. (2nd sheet)
• Output with 20% less light intensity than the 1st test chart.
7 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test chart and set as original.
9 Press [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test chart. (3rd sheet)
10Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test chart and set as original.
7 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (High-end model only)
1 Input "464" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
2 Select [Calib].
4-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Place the test chart 1 on to platen glass table with face down and arrow side far.
• Put approximately 20 sheets of white paper on to the chart.
5 Once [OK] comes up then continue with chart 2 and 3 repeating step 2 to 3.
9
1 Exiting from the maintenance mode
2 Input "001" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
• The maintenance mode is exited.
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 After removing the front rib (c), remove the right top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the right ISU cover (b).
4-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the lens cover (b).
D D
D
D
D
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
a
a a a
a b a
Figure 7-4-1
4-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
D b
4-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the right ISU cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
4 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the front glass cover (b).
* : Remove the right side of the machine first and then detach it.
b
a
4-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Remove two pins (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear glass cover (b).
a
a
b
4-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
9 Remove two hooks (g) and remove FFC guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
e
b
g a
h
14j0258a
10Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame A (c).
11Check or replace the lamp unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
12When replacing the lamp unit (b), execute maintenance mode U411 (adjusting the scanner automatically).
b
a
4-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the front glass cover (b).
• Remove the right side of the machine first and then detach it.
b
a
4-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Remove two pins (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear glass cover (b).
a
a
b
4-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
9 Remove two hooks (g) and remove FFC guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
e
b
g a
h
14j0258a
10Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lamp unit (b) from mirror frame A (c).
b
a
4-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Remove each one screw (c) (M3x×8), the front wire presser plate (d) and the rear wire presser plate (e) from
mirror frame A (f).
d e
c
c
13Detach the round terminals on the left side of scanner unit (a) from the scanner wire springs (c).
b
d c
4-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Wind the scanner wires (c) three turns inward and five turns outward.
• Shorter from small ball of the scanner wire is wound to come outside.
• Use the gray wire for the machine front side and black wire for the machine rear side.
3 Secure the scanner wires (c) using the scanner wire stoppers (d).
5 3
3 5
a
c
b
a
c
d d
4-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Move the mirror frame B (a) as shown in the figure and insert two frame securing tools (c) into the positioning
holes (b) at the front and rear of the machine center to fix the mirror frame B (a) in position.
c
4-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Hook the round terminals (c) to the catches (d) inside the scanner unit.
3 Wind the inner scanner wires (e) around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit from below
to above.
• The scanner wires pass the lower side of mirror frame B (j).
4 Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to above.
6 Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i).
4-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
i h g
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
b a
i
h
g e
j
b e
c a LQQHU
RXWHU
4-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
8 Detach the scanner wire stoppers and the mirror frame securing tools.
9 Align the scanner wires to the inside along with the small ball in the wire drum.
10Move the mirror frame B (b) from side to side to make the wire smoothly.
12Move the mirror frame A (a) and the mirror frame B (b) to the machine left, and insert two frame securing tools
(d) into the positioning holes (c) at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the mirror frame A (a) and
the mirror frame B (b) in position.
13Attach the front wire holder plate (e) and rear wire holder plate (f) to the mirror frame A (a).
g g d
e
f
d
c h
b
a
a h
b
4-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, and release the lower hook (c) lifting the cover. After
that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4 Release the wire saddle (c) and remove the wire (d).
YC9
YC10 b
YC1
YC11
YC6
a
YC2
YC3
d
YC7 c
YC4
YC5
4-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the feed drive unit (b).
a a
a
a
b a
a
a a
4-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, and release the lower hook (c) lifting the cover. After
that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Release 4 wire saddles(a). Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
b c
4-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
(b: ) 36
YC
YC36
YC22
21
YC
YC19 19
YC 25
YC
YC21
YC33 YC17 2 2
YC37 YC
YC24 YC25
17
YC
6
YC
YC32 33
YC 30
4 28 YC
YC2 32 YC
YC6 YC 1
YC28 YC
23
YC2
YC3
YC23
YC1
YC30 a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
YC29
3
YC
YC35
7 Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
4-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction because of interference between wires
and waste toner joint unless detach the drive unit without hanging the wires (b) on hook (a). This leads waste
toner detection error or clogging up.
9 Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out.
1 2
c
b
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction unless detach the drive unit without
removing waste toner joint (a). This leads waste toner detection error.
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the main drive unit away.
4-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
10Remove six screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a b a a
a
a a a
12Release 4 hooks (b) and take the waste toner convey unit (c) away.
13Check the waste toner convey unit (c) and clean or replace it.
14Check the main drive unit (d) and clean or replace it.
b d
c b
a
a
b
a a
4-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
High-end Model
1 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Disconnect two connectors (d). Release four wire saddles(a). Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and
remove the wire (c).
b c
a d d
4-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
(b: ) 36
YC
YC36
YC22
21
YC
YC19 19
YC 25
YC
YC21
YC33 YC17 2 2
YC
YC24 YC25
17
YC
6
YC
YC32 33
YC 30
4 28 YC
YC2 32 YC
YC6 YC
YC
1
YC28
23
YC2
YC3
YC23
YC1
YC30
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
YC29
3
YC
YC35
7 Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
4-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction because of interference between wires
and waste toner joint unless detach the drive unit without hanging the wires (b) on hook (a). This leads waste
toner detection error or clogging up.
9 Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out toward you.
1 2
c
b
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction unless detach the drive unit without
removing waste toner joint (a). This leads waste toner detection error.
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the main drive unit away.
4-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
10Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a b a a
a
a a a
12Check the waste toner convey unit (b) and clean or replace it.
13Check the main drive unit (c) and clean or replace it.
a c
b a
4-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
1 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
8 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
9 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).
b
4-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
12Release four connectors (b) from the main PWB (a) and withdraw from the aperture (e). Remove the wire (c)
from two wire saddles (d).
c
e
d
b
4-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Disconnect the FFC and the connector from the engine PWB.
b
c
a
15Lifting and pulling the shield box (a) then release the hooks (b).
a
a
b
4-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Caution
In case of operating at the rear lower side of the machine opening the shield box, pay attention not to hit your
head to the shield box.
b
a
18Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the container motor assembly (b)
19Check the container motor assembly (b) and clean or replace it.
b a
4-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
8 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
9 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).
b
4-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
12Release four connectors (b) from the main PWB (a) and withdraw from the aperture (e). Remove the wire (c)
from two wire saddles (d).
c
e
d
b
4-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Disconnect the FFC and the connector from the engine PWB.
b
c
a
15Lifting and pulling the shield box (a) then release the hooks (b).
a
a
b
4-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Caution
In case of operating at the rear lower side of the machine opening the shield box, pay attention not to hit your
head to the shield box.
17Remove the connector (b) from the container motor (a). Remove ten connectors (d) from feed image PWB (c).
18Remove the wire (e) from the five wire saddles (f).
b
a
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
e
d c
19Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
20Unlatch six upper side hooks (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b) and then four lower side hooks (c), and then
remove the transfer terminal cover (d).
b
c
c a
a
d
4-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Important
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a), make sure that the rib (b) is between two terminals. (Eight
locations)
4-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
22Disconnect two connectors (d). Release four wire saddles(a). Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and
remove the wire (c).
b c
a
(b: ) 36
YC
YC36
YC22
21
YC
YC19 19
YC 25
YC
YC21
YC33 YC17 C2
2
Y
YC24 YC25
17
YC
6
YC
YC32 33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC 3 2
YC6 YC C1
YC28 Y
23
YC2
YC3
YC23
YC1
YC30
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
YC29
3
YC
YC35
4-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
24Release the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove the wire (c).
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction because of interference between wires
and waste toner joint unless detach the drive unit without hanging the wires (b) on hook (a). This leads waste
toner detection error or clogging up.
4-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
26Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out.
1 2
c
b
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction unless detach the drive unit without
removing waste toner joint (a). This leads waste toner detection error.
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the main drive unit away.
27Remove six screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a b a a
a
a a a
4-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
28Widen two each hooks (a) and unlatch the hook (b), and then pull out the joint (c) of the toner supply drive unit
to remove it.
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
29Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the toner supply drive unit (b).
30Check the toner supply drive unit (b) and clean or replace it.
a
b a
a a a
b
4-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
8 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
9 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).
b
4-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
12Release four connectors (b) from the main PWB (a) and withdraw from the aperture (e). Remove the wire (c)
from two wire saddles (d).
c
e
d
b
4-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Disconnect the FFC (b) and the connector (c) from the engine PWB (a).
b
c
a
15Lifting and pulling the shield box (a) then release the hooks (b).
a
a
b
4-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Caution
In case of operating at the rear lower side of the machine opening the shield box, pay attention not to hit your
head to the shield box.
18Remove the two connectors (a) and wire (b) from the hook (c).
b
c
20Detach the fuser drive unit (c) in the direction of the arrow, while pressing the release lever (b).
21Check the fuser drive unit (c) and clean or replace it.
c
a
4-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
d c
b
4-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
(4) Others
(4-1) Detaching and attaching the SSD
1 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
d
c
a
b
Important
In order to avoid from damage, when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
4-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 When UPDATE completion is displayed on the control panel, turn OFF/ON the power with inserted USB drive
A.
4-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
1 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8). Remove two hooks (b) (M3x8) and remove the hard disk assembly (c).
d d
b
b
c
b
Important
When removing the connector of the hard disk (a), pay attention not to apply the force on the battery of the main
PW.
Applying the force may get damaged the terminal.
4-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Remove four screws (a) and remove the hard disk drive (b).
5 Check the hard disk drive (b) and clean or replace it.
a
a
a
a
• Execute maintenance mode U024 (See 6-38) when formatting a new HDD.
Important
Do not touch on the PWB face (b) when installing the HDD (a) to avoid from damage.
a a
4-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
a
b
d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
c b
b
b
A a
a
b b
c
B
b b
b
b
c
b b c
b
4-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Replacement steps
Upper side (A)
1 When replace lift motor, disconnect connector (b) from original lift motor (a) and remove wire (c) releasing 2
hooks (d).
A a b B db
a
d
c
c
e b
f
e d
f
c
c
A
a
B a
4-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Release the hook (b) while pressing the left and right levers (a), detach the fuser unit (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
b
a
b a
4-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
c
a
a
b
a
Clear the MC corrective counter with maintenance mode U167 [Clear] after fuser discharge or IH unit
replacement.
4-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the eject unit (c).
b
c
b
b b
4-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
b
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Pull toner container (Y,M,C,K) out in ready mode.
a
b
d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
4-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Release five hooks (b) of front right cover (a) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum pin (a) of the front cover for maintenance.
a
4-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
7 Remove each one screw (b) of the strap (c) and remove front cover for maintenance (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
b c
c
b
10Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
b c
d
4-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Remove the pin (b) while bending the fulcrum and detach the waste toner box cover (a).
4-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
17Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
4-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
19Remove one connector (a) and detach the front container unit (c).
a
b c
b
b c b b
b
21Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
22Unlock clamp (a) and remove the wire (c) from connector (b) on waste toner box unit.
Important
Make room for the wire (a) once it connects.
Otherwise, pay attention, wire pulls the toner box unit and that makes detection error or early detection.
4-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
23Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out toward you.
1 2
c
b
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction unless detach the drive unit without
removing waste toner joint (a). This leads waste toner detection error.
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the waste toner box unit away.
24Pull the rail (b) of upper stage cassette and remove one screw (a) (M3x8).
a b
4-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
27Disconnect the connector (c). Remove seven screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the front inner cover (b).
a
b
a a
b a
a a
a
a
a a
a b
a
a
4-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
28Disconnect one connector (a).
30Remove two hooks (c) and remove the drum developer relay PWB (d).
b c
d
d
4-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
32Release 4 hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
35Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the front side aperture (b) and widen it in the direction of the arrow to
release four hooks (d) and to remove the upper left cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
f
Notes for attaching
Attach the top left cover (e) after latching four lower hooks (f) and then the upper hook (d).
4-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
38Lift and remove four hooks (c) and remove left lower cover (b).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
40Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the waste toner box unit (b).
41Check the waste toner unit (b) and clean or replace it.
a
• When replacing with the new waste toner box unit, remove two screws (c)(M3x8) from the old unit (a) and
detach the slide rail (b) and attach it to the new unit.
c
b
b c
4-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner box.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
• Accessories for waste toner box unit
A: Waste toner box unit
B: Waste toner bottle
1 Turn on after waste toner box replacement without waste toner bottle.
2 Select maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3 Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner] then press [Start] key.
5 Insert the empty waste toner box and close the waste toner box cover (a).
6 Press [Waste Toner] and confirm that [None] turn to [Empty] and press [Execute] then [Start] key.
7 Renew the value next to [None/Empty] and confirm [OK] next to [Execute].
• If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
(If the detected waste toner box weight unstable (box installed/not installed), an error is indicated)
4-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
High-end Model
Pull toner container (Y,M,C,K) out in ready mode.
In case that container cover (b) is locked, open it with container solenoid that is run by maintenance mode U033
a
b
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Pull toner container (Y,M,C,K) out in ready mode.
a
b
d
e
d b
e
c
a
b
c
4-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Release five hooks (b) of front right cover (a) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Remove the stop ring (b) from the fulcrum pin (a) of the front cover for maintenance.
a
4-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
7 Remove each one screw (b) of the strap (c) and remove front cover for maintenance (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
b c
c
b
10Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
b c
d
4-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Remove the pin (b) while bending the fulcrum and detach the waste toner box cover (a).
4-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
13Open inner cover (a) pulling left and right lever (b) on the cover.
b b
17Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
4-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
19Remove one connector (a) and detach the front container unit (c).
a
b c
b
b c b b
b
21Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, remove it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
22Unlock clamp (a) and remove the wire (c) from connector (b) on waste toner box unit.
Important
Make room for the wire (a) once it connects.
Otherwise, pay attention, wire pulls the toner box unit and that makes detection error or early detection.
4-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
23Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and pull it out toward you.
1 2
c
b
Important
Cleaning spring for sensor in waste toner joint may have malfunction unless detach the drive unit without
removing waste toner joint (a). This leads waste toner detection error.
Waste toner joint has to be released before take the waste toner box unit away.
24Pull the rail (b) of upper stage cassette, remove one screw (a)(M3x8).
a b
4-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
27Disconnect the connector (c). Remove seven screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the front inner cover (b).
a
b
a a
b a
a a
a
a
a a
a b
a
a
4-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
30Remove two hooks (c), remove the drum developer relay PWB (d).
b c
b
d d
a d
a
31Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).
32Release 4 hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
4-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
35Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (c) into the front side aperture (b) and widen it in the direction of the arrow to
release four hooks (d) and to remove the upper left cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
f
Notes when attaching
Attach the top left cover (e) after latching four lower hooks (f) and then the upper hook (d).
38Lift and remove four hooks (c) and remove left lower cover (b).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
40Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the waste toner box unit (b).
41Check the waste toner unit (b) and clean or replace it.
a
• When replacing with the new waste toner box unit, remove two screws (c)(M3x8) from the old unit (a) and
detach the slide rail (b) and attach it to the new unit.
c
b
b c
4-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner box.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
• Accessories for waste toner box unit
A: Waste toner box unit
B: Waste toner bottle
1 Turn on after waste toner box replacement without waste toner bottle.
2 Select maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3 Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
5 Insert the empty waste toner box and close the waste toner box cover (a).
6 Press [Waste Toner] and confirm that [None] turn to [Empty] and press [Execute] then [Start] key.
4-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
k
c
a
j
h
i
High-end Model
k c
m
l
a
j o
g h
f
e b
d i
b. Toner sucking fan motor *a intake *3 j. Eject/IH fan motor front intake *2
c. Controller fan motor: intake intake *1 k. Eject/IH fan motor middle: intake intake *2
*1: Rating label side: The upper side, *2: Rating label side: The inside, *3: Rating label side: The lower side
*a: High-end model only
4-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
(5) PWBs
Important
Following procedures have to be done before PWB replacement.
Otherwise PWB gets broken.
• Unplug power code.
• Press power switch for more than 1 second. (Remove electrical charge in main unit.)
4-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Remove six screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the engine PWB (b).
4 Check or replace the engine PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
b
a YC1
a YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS15 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
a YC31
YC40
b b
YC36
YC9
4-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Place the FCC to slot (d) of the connector and push it in until conductive face comes to see.
b
YS1
YS1
b
a a
4-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
High-end Model
1 Remove one screw (a) (M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Remove eight screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the engine PWB (b).
4 Check or replace the engine PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
b
a
a
a YC1
YC29 YC6
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
a YC31
YC40
YC34
YC9 YC10 YC4 YC27 YC21 YC22
4-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
b b
Connect FFC cable
• In case of FCC replacement for YC9 and YC36, prepare a set of FCC and 2 connectors, and follow the
procedures below.
YC36
YC9 YC10
2 Place the FCC to slot (d) of the connector and push it in until conductive face comes to see.
4-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
YS1
b
YC39 YC33
YC34
YC4 YC27
a
a
4-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Remove screw (d) (M3x6) and take the PWB (e) away.
d e
e
f
a
c
Important
In case that remove connector (a) from main PWB (b), pull it straightforward against the PWB (b) and do not
pull in the other ways.
Pulling in the other ways gets FPC (f) broken
4-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6 Detach the DP relay PWB (a) while removing the backside connector (d).
b
YC25
c
d
c
a YC1
c
8 Remove eight screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the main PWB (a).
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
b YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
b YC10
b
YC2
b
YC51
a b
YC33
b YC32
YC23 YC42
4-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Important
Main unit does not work without SSD.
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
4-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Restore exported machine settings and job settings with U917 in advance.
1 Input "004" using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
2 Select [Calib].
3 Place the test chart 1 on to platen glass table with face down and arrow side far.
• Put approximately 20 sheets of white paper on to the chart.
4-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Once [OK] comes up then continue with chart 2 and 3 repeating step 2 to 3.
4-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
b a
4-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6 Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
10Release three upper side hooks (d) and remove the main high voltage PWB (a).
11Check or replace the main high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
c d
d
e d
c
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
e
4-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
High-end Model
1 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
3 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
b a
4-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6 Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
10Release three upper side hooks (d) and remove the main high voltage PWB (a).
11Check or replace the main high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
d
c d
d
e d
c
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
e
4-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
7 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).
b
4-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
9 Release the hooks (b) and remove the right rear top cover (c).
c
b
10Release four connectors (b) from the main PWB (a) and draw from the aperture (e). Remove the wire (c) from
two wire saddles (d).
c
e
d
b
4-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
11Disconnect the FFC and the connector from the engine PWB.
b
c
a
13After lifting the shield box (a), draw it and release the hooks (b).
a
a
b
4-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Caution
In case of operating at the rear lower side of the machine opening the shield box, pay attention not to hit your
head to the shield box.
15Remove the connector (b) from the container motor (a). Remove ten connectors (d) from feed image PWB (c).
16Remove the wire (e) from the five wire saddles (f).
b
a
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
e
d c
17Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
18Unlatch six upper side hooks (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b) and then four lower side hooks (c), and then
remove the transfer terminal cover (d).
b
c
c a
a
d
4-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Important
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a), make sure that the rib (b) is between two terminals. (Eight
locations)
19Disconnect one connector (b) from the transfer high voltage PWB (a).
21Release two board supports (b) and remove the transfer high voltage PWB (a).
22Check or replace the transfer high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
d b
c
a
4-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
Caution
Even after power off and unplug, some capacitors on power supply board may still have electro charge, so pay
attention not to touch those parts.
Low-end model
2 Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, lift in slightly opened state and release the lower
hook (c). After that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
a
a
b a
4-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) and remove the ground terminal (c).
a
b
a
d
9 Take PF drawer holder (c) away with pulling to release from grooves (d).
c
Important
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two grooves (b).
4-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
10Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
14Release three upper side hooks (d) and remove the main high voltage PWB (a).
c
c d
d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a c
b
b
b
4-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
15Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the shield lid (b).
a
b
a
16Remove four screws (a) (M3x8).
17Rotating to unplug the lower side in advance and remove the power shield (b).
a
a
b
b
a
4-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
18Disconnect all the connectors from the power supply PWB (a).
20Release two board supports (c) and remove power supply PWB (a).
21Check or replace the power supply PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC8
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
c
TB1 TB2
b TB3
b YC4
c
b
a
High-end Model
23Push down the rear lower cover (b), release the upper rib, and release the lower hook (c) lifting the cover. After
that, detach it in the direction of the arrow.
1 c
c 3
4-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
b a
26Disconnect two connectors (a).
27Remove the screw (b) (M3x8) and remove the ground terminal (c).
a
b
a
d
4-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
30Take PF drawer holder (c) away with pulling to release from grooves (d).
c
Important
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two grooves (b).
4-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
31Disconnect all the connectors from the main high voltage PWB (a).
35Release three upper side hooks (d) and remove the main high voltage PWB (a).
c d
c d
e d d
c
e e
b
b a
b c
b
b
36Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the shield lid (b).
a
b
4-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
38Rotating to unplug the lower side in advance and remove the power shield (b).
a
a
b
b
a
39Disconnect all the connectors from the power supply PWB (a).
41Release two board supports (c) and remove the power supply PWB (a).
42Check or replace the power supply PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC8
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
c TB1 TB2
b TB3
b YC4
c
b
a
4-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) and release the lock then lift up the machine rear side (c) and slide it to
the front side.
3 Lift up the pin (d) and remove it then detach the sub tray (a).
d
b
a
4-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
b a
2 Lift the lever (b) of the upper tray (a), release the lock, slide in the direction of the arrow, unplug pin (c) and
remove in the direction of the arrow.
4-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Release two hooks (c) and remove the left rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c
5 Open the front cover.
7 Insert the front side of aperture into flat-head screwdriver (c), spread in the direction of the arrow and release
four hooks (d) then remove the left top cover (e).
a
d
e
d
d
b
a
4-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
b a
4-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
a
a
18Check or replace the IH PWB (b), and then reattach the parts which is removed.
c
a
a
a
a
a
a
4-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
2 Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower
hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
4-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
5 Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
6 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8).
7 Remove the operation lid (c) from the operation unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
4-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
b a
b
Pull toner container (Y,M,C,K) out in ready mode.
In case that container cover (b) is locked, open it with container solenoid that is run by maintenance mode U033
a
b
4-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
12Remove one connector (a) and detach the front container unit (c).
a
b c
b
b c b b
b
14Unlatch two hooks (b) with a flat-blade screw driver and remove the front cover (d).
b
c
d
4-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
15Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the operation section (b).
a a
17Release two hooks (b), and then remove the operation unit lid (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
c
b
18If the bracket is down then rotate it to up.
4-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
19Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the operation rear cover (c) from operation section (b).
a
a
a c
a
b
20Disconnect all FFCs , FPCs and the connectors from the operation PWB (c).
21Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the operation panel main PWB (c) from operation section (b).
22Check or replace the operation panel main PWB (c) and then reattach the parts which are removed.
a
a
a
c
a
4-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
6
A
a
b
a
3 Up side of MP lift plate (b) down holding the positioning screw (a)
4-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly procedures
4 Insert the positioning screw (a) to hole of the gear and attach it.
b
5 Align D-cut of MP paper width sensor to D-cut shaft and attach it.
6 Align Cut-off if sensor cover to positioning screw (b) and remove the positioning screw. Attach sensor cover.
a
b
4-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a c a
a
a
3 Remove three screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF drive unit (d).
4 Check or replace the PF drive unit (d), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
c
c
c
4-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the paper feeder (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
a
3 Disconnect two connectors (a) and three screws (b) (M3x8). Remove the PF lift motor (c).
4 Check, clean or replace PF lift motor (c) and then reattach in the original position the parts which are removed.
b a
c
b
b
c
b c b
b
a b
b
b
b b
b c
4-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
Replacement steps
1 When replace PF lift motor, disconnect connector (b) from original PF lift motor (a) and remove wire (c)
releasing 2 hooks (d).
2 Connect (b) of wire (c) to new PF lift motor (e) and latch 2 hooks (f).
a b
e b
4-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
1 Remove five screws (a) (M3x8). Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
a c a
a
a
3 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the PF main PWB (a).
4 Check or replace the PF main PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC11 YC10 b
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC14
YC12 b
a
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
4-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
c a
a
a
a
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8).
b
b a
b
b
4-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
5 Release the three wire saddles, and release the wire stoppers (b) and remove wires (c)
a a a b
6 Pull the lever (b) of the wire holder (a) and remove the wire holder (a).
a a b
7 Remove five screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF drive unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
8 Check or replace the PF drive unit (a), and then reattach in the original position the parts which are removed.
b
b
b b
4-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
c a
a
a
a
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8).
b
b a
b
b
4-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
5 Disconnect the connector (c). Remove three screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the lift motor 2 (a).
b a
b c
6 Release the hook (d) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the PF lift motor 1 unit (a).
b
d
b
b
7 Disconnect connector (c) and detach the PF lift motor 1 (a).
a
b
c
b
8 Check or replace the PF lift motor, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
c a
a
a
a
3 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF main PWB (a).
4 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the PF PWB (a).
5 Check or replace the PF main PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
4-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
1 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8). Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).
a
a
a
2 Disconnect the three connectors (a) and the connector (b) from the PF PWB (d).
a d
b a
a
c c
4-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
4 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF drive unit (a) from the main unit while pushing in the switch
lever (c).
b
b
4-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
1 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
a
a
2 Release six wire stoppers (d) and one cable clamp, and then remove the wire of PF lift motor (a).
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
4-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
4 Remove three screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the PF lift motor (a).
5 Check or replace the PF lift motor unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
1 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
a
a
2 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).
3 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the PF PWB (a) from 2 hooks (c).
4 Check or replace the PF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
4-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b).
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear cover (b).
4-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
7 Remove the DP wire from wire saddles (b) and wire saddles (c)
4-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
9 Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
c
b
4-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear left cover (b).
4-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear left cover (b).
4-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
3 Open the lid (a) and remove the DP rear middle cover (b).
4 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear right cover (b).
a
4-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
6 Remove one screw (b) (M3x8) and detach the wire guide (c).
b
10Check or replace the DP PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c
a
4-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove a screw (a) (M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear cover (b).
4-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
6 Disconnect the connector (a), release two wire saddle (b) and remove the DP wire (b).
7 Disconnect the connector (d), release three wire saddle (f) and remove the DP wire (e).
e
f a
c b
c
4-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
8 Remove the DP wire connector (a) from the wire holder (b).
a
9 Open the document processor.
b a a
4-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
11Slide the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
a
c
4-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
b
c
3 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
b
a
a
4-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
b
c
3 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
b
a
a
4-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
7 Check or replace the DP PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c a
b
a
4-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
b
c
3 Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
b
a
a
4-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
4 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8) at the machine rear side, detach DPCIS unit (a) the upward.
4-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
6 Pushing the two hooks (c) of the front and rear glass holder (b) in the direction of the arrow to unlatch them
then take them away.
7 Take DPCIS glass (d) and DPCIS (e) from DPCIS unit (a)
• Pay attention about face/back of DPCIS glass when attaching the CIS glass.
Pay attention to the marking in the figure.
Miss the face/back or the marking leads paper dust contamination and it is affected scanning quality.
b
1 b
2 2 f
c c
Important
Check the position of black marking (f) for distinction of the face/back side of the glass.
Also, make sure not to touch the glass surface.
If it should get dirty, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
4-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
9 Remove four pins (c) with the flat-head screwdriver (b) and detach DPSHD PWB (d).
10Replace the DPCIS and then reattach the parts in the original position.
11When replacing the new DPCIS assembly, execute the following procedures.
13Execute maintenance mode U091 (White lines correction setting). (See page 6-89)
15When white streak appears on the image of the test copy, executing step 13, 14 again, repeating till white
streak disappears.
16Execute maintenance mode U411 (scanner auto adjustment) (See page 6-253)
4-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove one screw (a) (M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b).
a
3 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the DP rear cover (b).
a
a
4-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
6 Remove the connector (a) of DP wire (c).
7 Detach the DP wire (c) from the two wire saddle (b).
a
b b
4-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
8 Remove the DP wire connector (a) from the wire holder (b).
a
9 Open the document processor (a).
10Lift up the document processor (a) and detach the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
b c
c
4-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
a
4-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
3 Release two hooks (a) and remove the DP rear cover (b) from the document processor (c).
a
c
4-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
a
4-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
3 Release two hooks (a) and remove the DP rear cover (b) from the document processor (c).
a
c
4 Disconnect all the connectors (a) from the DP main PWB (e).
b
d
a
a
a c
a
4-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
10Check or replace the DP PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
a
a
4-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
4-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
5 Lift up the DF front cover (b) and unlatch two hooks (c) to remove it.
a b
7 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the DF PWB (a).
8 Check or replace the DF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC7
YC17
YC20
YC5
YC11
YC10
YC6
YC3 YC16
YC19
b
a b b
4-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
b
4-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
Important
Do not get positions (b) to touch anything once place DF unit (a).
a
b
b
c
4-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
10Detach the upper exit cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c b
b b
b a
4-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
4-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
19Slide the removed DF staple unit (a) without any interference with the mount.
21Rotate it and get the DF staple unit (c) to aperture (d) side.
1
a
d
b
c
22Pull out DF stable unit (a) from the aperture.
23Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Important
Be careful that damage on gear or other parts while the unit go through the aperture.
4-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
• In case of DF staple unit (a) replacement, detach staple guide (b) and attach to the new staple unit.
a
b
4-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
a
b
a
4-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
3 Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and detach BR convey motor 1 (b) and 2 (c).
a c
a
b
a
4 Check or replace the BR convey motor 1 or 2, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
a
b
a
4-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
3 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the BR PWB (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
1
1
YC4
YC2
a
11
11 1 YC1
YC3 4 1
a
a
4 Check or replace the BR PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Pull out the waste punch box (b) and then remove it.
3 Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift it up to release the lock and
open the DF staple cover (a).
4-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
b
b
5 Lift up the DF staple unit (a) from the front side to release the hook (b) and pull it out toward you.
6 Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
• When replacing the DF staple unit (a), detach the staple guide (b) and staple mounting plate (c) to attach the
new DF staple unit.
4-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
3 Remove two screws (a) (M4x8).
4 Release three hooks (b) and remove the DF rear cover (c).
a a
4-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
7 Remove the board support (c) and remove the DF PWB (a).
8 Check or replace the DF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC17
YC5
YC11
YC10
YC19
YC3 YC16
U3
b
c
a
b
4-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Pull out the waste punch box (b) and then remove it.
a
b
3 Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and lift it up to release the lock and
open the DF staple cover (a).
4-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
b
b
5 Lift up the DF staple unit (a) from the front side to release the hook (b) and pull it out toward you.
6 Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
• When replacing the DF staple unit (a), detach the staple guide (b) and staple cover (c) to attach the new DF
staple unit.
c
b
4-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
3 Remove three screws (a) (M4x8).
4-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
6 Remove six screws (b) (M3x8) and remove the DF PWB (a).
7 Check or replace the DF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
YC21
YC14
YC5 YC20
YC15
YC4
YC8
YC7 YC22
YC6
YC9
YC1
U3
YC10 YC23
YC2 YC13
a
b
b b
4-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
a
a
a
a
b
2 Remove 2 screws (a) (M4x10) and remove the BF staple unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
4-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and assembly (Enhancement)
2 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the PWB cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a a
a
a
a
a
1
1 YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1
20 10
1 YC13
1
2 YC15
YC4
1
6
YC16
7
4
YC3
1
7
4
YC7
YC5
1
1
1 15
YC20
30 16
c a
a
a
a
4-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
Note
In case of maintenance for enhancement, separate them if necessary.
See Installation guide for the detail of separation.
2 Remove top cover front lid (a) and rear lid (b) with flat screwdriver (c).
a d
b
c
d
c d
4-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
4 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the upper inner cover (b).
a
a
b a
a
4-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
7 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the upper rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a
8 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8). Release two hooks (c), and then remove the lower rear cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow.
a
b
a
4-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
(2-2) Upper front cover/Upper left cover/Middle front cover/Lower inner cover/Lower front cover/
Lower left cover
1 Open upper front cover (a).
2 Remove top cover front lid (a) and rear lid (b) with flat screwdriver (c).
a d
b
c
d
c d
4-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
4 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the upper inner cover (b).
a
a
b a
a
4-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
7 Remove the strap (c) in the direction of the arrow by pushing hook (a) with screwdrive (b).
c a
c
8 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and fulcrum shaft bracket (b) and upper front cover (c) in the direction of the
arrow.
b
a
9 Remove three screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the upper left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
a
a
4-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
10Remove screw (a) (M3x8) and remove the middle front cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a
11Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lower front cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
12Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the lower inner cover (b).
4-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
13Remove 2 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the lower left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the upper inner cover (b).
a
a
b a
a
4-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
3 Insert the flat-blade screwdriver (a) into the opening (b), release the hook (c) and detach the connector cover
(e) in the direction of the arrow.
• Hang the hook (d) first and attach it.
b b
e
c
e d
6 Release the projection (c) and detach the waste duct (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
a
b
4-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
a
b
b
8 Slide the staple lock cover (a) in the direction of the arrow to release the lock and move the staple unit (b)
9 Insert the screwdriver (b) through the round hole (a) and press the staple shift plate (c) in the direction of the
arrow to release the lock.
d
a
4-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
11After lifting up Section A and releasing two positioning bosses (a), release two hooks (b) and detach the DF
staple unit (c) from the base (d).
d
c
d
12Rotate Section A so that it is on the side of the opening (b) . Then, detach the DF staple unit (a).
13Check or replace the DF staple unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b
b
a a
a
• When replacing the DF staple unit (a), detach the staple guide (b) and staple mounting plate (c) to attach the
new DF staple unit.
c c
a
4-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
b a
9 1 8 1 1 6 20 1
1 2 YC19 9 YC29 1 YC18 YC17 YC20 30 1
YC10 YC27
5
13 YC40
1
YC9 1
YC28
1 1
B1 A16
YC42 7
YC15
12
16
B16 A1 10
5 YC23
YC14
YC41
1
1
1
6 16
YC7
YC30
1
19
YC6 1
1
19 8 4
YC8 YC25
YC31 1
1
12 9
1 1
YC12 11 1 36 16 30
8 19 YC38
YC11 5 1 YC36 YC37 1
1 18 1 15 9 YC21 1
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the DF main PWB (a).
a
a
4-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7130)
b a
YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and detach the DF main PWB (a).
4-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
ߑ
ߒ
a
b a
b
3 Disconnect two connectors (a).
a
4-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
5 Remove the band (b) from frame and take the wire out.
6 Remove screw (b) (M4x8) and take the ground wire (a) away.
b
a
4-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
7 Remove screw (b) (M3x8) and detach the wire guide (a).
b
a
8 Remove four screws (a) (M4x8) and remove the middle conveying unit (b).
b a
9 Open exit cover (a) and hold up exit tray unit (b).
4-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
10Remove screw (a) (M3x10 Black TP) and take side cover front (b) away.
b
b
11Remove screw (a) (M3x10 Black TP) and take side cover rear (b) away.
b b
12Put down exit tray unit (b) and close exit cover (a).
a
4-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
13Remove screw (a) (M3x8) and take the ground wire out.
15Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and detach the exit tray support plate rear (b).
ߒ
ߑ
4-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
18Take Booklet unit (a) away from the raight side of DF.
4-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
2 Remove 2 screws (a) (M4x10) and remove the BF staple unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Remove 4 screws (a) (M3x8) and remove the PWB cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b a a
a
a
a
a
4-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Booklet Unit (BF-9100)
1
YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1 1 YC23 4
20 1 1
1 YC13 10
YC15
1
7
YC19
YC16
1
7
4
1
YC3 YC11
1 1
4
1
7 YC26
4
YC7 3
YC5
1 YC22
1 6
1
YC25 6
3 1 1 YC18 YC20
16
30
c a
a
a
a
4-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Paper feed/convey
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
MPT feed
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Exit/Duplex
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Scanning
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
MIRROR A/B/C CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry wipe and
air blow.
LENS ISU CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry wipe and
air blow.
4-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
SENSOR OPT. CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material only for failure.
(7NXPS181EL1MH01 CL (Sensor emit/receipt only)
)
Drive/Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Paper feed/convey
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
MPT feed
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Exit/Duplex
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Scanning
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
MIRROR A/B/C CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry wipe and
air blow.
LENS ISU CL Cleaning only for image failure (lines). Dry wipe and
air blow.
SENSOR OPT. CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material only for failure.
(7NXPS181EL1MH01 CL (Sensor emit/receipt only)
)
4-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Drive/Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
DP paper feed
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DP convey/switchback section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DP/Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
300 600
PLATE ORIGINAL CL CL CL CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303JC0420*)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
DP paper feed
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
300 600
BELT PF CL RE RE RE RE CL: Alcohol or dry material
(303LL0719*) CH: Check feed counter U905: Replace every 300K
4-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DP conveying section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
DP table section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DP Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
DP CIS section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
DP paper feed
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DP convey/switchback section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
DP Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry (X 1,000 counts)
4-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Paper feed/convey
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
PARTS PULLEY SET CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
SP RE CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every 300K
(302ND9470*)
PF drive section/Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
Clutches CL CL Check paper path timing and condition at feed/convey
RE section.
4-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Paper feed/convey
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
PARTS PULLEY SET CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
SP RE CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every 300K
(302ND9470*)
4-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
PF drive section/Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
Clutches CH CH Check paper path timing and condition at feed/convey
RE section.
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Appearance/Cover
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
Paper feed/convey
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
PULLEY FEED CL CH Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(302K90635*) RE CH: Check feed counter U901: Replace every 300K
Others
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit cycle
Sensors CH CH Dry wipe or air blow on receptor or of optical sensor
twice.
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
BR conveying section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
ROLLER FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303RD2401*)
4-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
SENSOR OPT CL CL: Air blow
(7NXPSR11GD6MH0
1)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
SENSOR OPT. CL CL: Air blow
(7NXPS133GD1+H01
)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
ROLLER FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
LOWER
(303RW0701*)
4-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance
DF Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
(7NXSG2A241++H
01)
(7NXKB1281AA2H0
1)
(7NXPSR11GD6FH
01)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
ROLLER FEED CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
LOWER
(303RW0701*)
4-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
(7NXSG2A241++H
01)
(7NXKB1281AA2H0
1)
(7NXPSR11GD6FH
01)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
PARTS ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
EJECT SP
(303ND9403*)
PULLEY DU LOW CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Puller for exit guide)
X2
PULLEY MIDDLE CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material (Puller for exit guide)
X2
4-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
BF Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
PARTS SENSOR OPT CL Air blow
SP X8
(303M89426*)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
MT convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
PARTS ROLLER CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
CONVEYING X3
(303LW9401*)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
PH Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
SENSOR FEED B CL CL: Air blow or dry wipe
(303H32750*)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
ROLLER FEED LOW CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303S80705_)
4-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
SENSOR OPT. CL CL: Air blow
(7NXPS133GD1+H01 x4
)
SENSOR CL x2
A,SEPARATION
(303H32746_)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
DF convey/exit section
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
ROLLER EJECT CL Wipe with alcohol or dry material
(303SP2816_)
4-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Scheduled maintenance procedure
BF Sensors
Maintenance Delive Call Scheduled Maintenance Points/Remarks
Parts/Location ry Conform to main unit
counts
SENSOR OPT. CL Air blow
(7NXSG2A141++H01 X3
)
Important
Do not use burnable spray for air blow in this list.
4-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
5Firmware
5 - 1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
*The processing time is reduced with parallel processing by group.
[GROUP 1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller Package DL_PKG_CTRL.2V8 (High) CPKG
DL_PKG_CTRL.2VG (Low)
5-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 FAX Board DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1,2
[GROUP 3 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Engine Firmware DL_ENGN.2V8 (High) ENGN
DL_ENGN.2VG (Low)
5-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
[GROUP 5 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Sub Panel Board (Sub Panel) DL_SPNL.2V8 SPNL
5-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
5-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
1 After turning the power switch (a) on and the screen is properly displayed, turn the
power switch (a) off.
2 Insert the USB drive (b) with the firmware into the USB drive slot and turn the oiwer
switch (a) on.
c
b
a
5-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
• When an error occurs during the firmware upgrade, the process is immediately interrupted and the error code
and error message come up.
Error Error content Error Error content
code code
0000 Other S000 Other signature verification error *1
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no upgrade target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
The file numbers in this table are for “xx” in the error codes.
5-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful. S000
2 Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on.
3 Check that the "Home" screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off.
Important
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB drive (b) during the firmware update.
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware
update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
* The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.
5-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6Maintenance mode
6 - 1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Execute the maintenance mode
Start
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the >ȁ@>9@ keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exit from the maintenance mode
U003 Setting the telephone number of the Set the telephone number of the service person.
service person
U004 Machine Number Display the machine serial number and setting
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjust the lead edge timing and the center line
U035 Folio size setting Set the Folio paper length and width.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjust the paper loop level between the rollers
adjustment
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Set speed correction of each motor
U059 Fan mode setting Set the drive mode of the conveying fan
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjust the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjust the lead edge timing for table scanning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center Adjust the center line for table scanning
line
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjust the starting position for DP scanning
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjust the center line for DP scanning
6-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U087 Setting the DP scanning position Change the scanning position as the corrective measure for the
change operation black lines
U091 void lines correction setting Set the void lines detection threshold
U099 Original size detection setting Check the original size detection and set the detection threshold
High U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
voltage
system U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Set and output the primary transfer bias voltage
U106 Secondary transfer voltage Set the secondary transfer bias voltage correction
adjustment
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the transfer belt cleaning bias voltage
adjustment
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Set the transfer belt unit cleaning control voltage
U119 Setting the drum Set the initial LSU laser power
U120 Drum drive distance counter Display the distance counter of drum
U122 Display the primary transfer unit Display the primary transfer unit number
number
U123 Primary transfer unit history Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter
history
U128 Transfer timing adjustment Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF timing
Develope U131 Toner sensor control voltage Adjust the the toner sensor control voltage
r system adjustment
U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply into the toner control level
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drive the toner motor
U136 Toner level detection setting Set the number of printable pages at toner near end
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values or set the high altitude mode.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Set the removal mode of overcharge toner
U156 Toner control level adjustment Display/Set the toner empty level
6-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Fuser U161 Fuser temperature adjustment Set the control temperature of fuser unit
U164 Fuser unit history Display the machine number and the fuser unit history
U169 Setting the fuser power source Display/Set the IH PWB control voltage
U193 Fuser drive control setting Change fuser drive control setting
Operatio U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
n
section/ U201 Initializing the touch screen Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch screen
Support
U203 Check DP operation Check the DP paper conveying operation
Equipme
nt U204 Key card/key counter setting Key card/Key counter connection setting
U208 Setting the paper size for the side Set the paper size of side deck
feeder
U211 Enhancement unit connection Set the connection of the enhancement units
setting
U221 USB host lock function setting Set USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock
U230 Optional device serial number Display the optional device serial number
U237 Finisher eject volume limit Set the main tray stack capacity
U247 Paper feed operation check Drives the PF motor and clutch
Mode U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set Change the preset value
Setting
U251 clearing the maintenance counter Display/Clear/Change the counter value
U252 Destination Set the machine operation and indication to the specification of the
destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Set the double count by paper size
6-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U271 Setting the page count unit Set the long paper count unit
U276 Switching the copy count mode Set the single color copy count mode
U285 Set Service Status Page Set the contents of Service status page
U323 Abnormal temperature and Switch the indication mode of the abnormal temperature/humidity
humidity notification setting detection
U325 Paper interval setting Set the print interval in high coverage
U327 Cassette heater control setting Select the cassette heater control setting
U332 Adjusting the black coverage Set the coefficient of the custom size
coefficient
U341 Printer cassette setting Set the cassette to printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switch the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance Set the maintenance timing display
due indication
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Set the BAM related sleep mode
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjust the margin for scanning originals
original from the document processor
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/ Adjust the write timing for 180 degree rotation copy
Reversal)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Execute auto halftone adjustment and retrieve correction data
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (High Correct the image density unevenness from LSU
model only)
U415 Adjusting the print position Execute the auto print position adjustment
automatically
U425 Set Target Input the Lab value on the adjustment original
U429 Adjusting the color balance offset Adjust the color balance offset
6-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U468 Color registration correction data Display the color registration correction data
U469 Primary transfer unit initial setting Set the primary transfer unit
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Set the JPEG compression rate
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning Check the LSU cleaning operation and Set the cleaning cycle
U486 Color/BW mode setting Set the productivity or color/bw mixed original
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initialize all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initialize the software switches of other than the machine data
U610 System 1 Set the number of scrap lines in actual size receiving or auto size
reduction.
U611 System 2 Set the number of adjustment lines for auto size reduction.
U615 System 6 Set the printing size and receiving image size
U620 FAX system Set the signal detection method for remote switching
U625 Communication settings Set the auto redialing interval and number
U634 Communication control procedures Set the acceptable error for TCF signal
5
U640 Communication time setting 1 Set the detection time by remote switching mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Set the time-out for the fax communication
6-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper Display/Clear the counters by paper source
source
U903 Clearing the jam counter Display/Clear number of jam by the trigger code
U904 Clearing the service call error Display/Clear the service call error and system error counts
counter
U910 Black rate data Clear the print coverage data and period
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Read/Write the backup data to USB drive
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clear the billing count and machine life count
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Display/Set the MC roller count
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log Set the maintenance mode log
U952 Maintenance mode workflow Execute the work flow for maintenance
U964 Retrieve Log Flow Transfer the log files from HDD to USB drive.
U977 Setting the data capture mode Store the data sent to the main unit into USB drive
U985 Developer unit history Display the developer unit number history
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time Display the accumulated DP CIS lighting time
6-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error. Output the event
log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to USB drive.
Purpose
Check the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items to
reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
Fax System Config *1 Print the list of local telephone number, confidential boxes, firmware versions.
Fax Action List *1 Output error history and commutation line list
Fax Self Status *1 Output the maintenance mode and fax settings.
Note
If A4/Letter paper is available, it is output with this size. Select an alternative cassette in case of missing A4 or
Letter paper size. Outputting status is displayed.
6-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Note
LLU Report data can not be transfered to the USB drive. Only print out is available.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Event Log
MFP ZF48600001
TASKalfa 6053ci (2) 2018/07/03 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2V8_S000.001.169 2018.07.17 [2V8_1000.001.001] [2ND_1100.001.007]
(3) (4)
(5) Machine No.:ZF48600001 (6)Total Life Count:100000 (7) Color Life Count:100000
6-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Event Log
MFP ZF48600001
TASKalfa 6053ci 2018/07/03 15:15
Firmware version 2V8_S000.001.169 2018.07.17 [2V8_1000.001.001] [2ND_1100.001.007]
6-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
No. Contents
(1) System version
6-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Up to 16 times are recorded. The total page count of paper Log code (5 types in Date and
All jams are displayed If the jam. hexadecimal) time of
last jams are less than 16 Number in ( ) is the color total occurrence
times. Older jam is deleted page counter (a) Cause of paper jam
from the Log in case of
(b) Paper source
exceeding 16 times.
(c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject
• Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection",for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (See page 7-
91)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (Paper feeder)
03: Cassette 3 (Paper feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (Paper feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (Paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
6-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont.
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
6-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
Up to 8 times of Self Total page count at the time The first two digits Date and
diagnostics errors are of self diagnostic error. (Identification) time of
recorded. Number in ( ) is the color total 01: Service call/System error occurrence
All the Self diagnostics error page counter 02: Unit replacement
are displayed unless
occurrences are 8 times or
less. Next two digits (Auto reboot
information)
00: No auto reboot
01: Auto reboot
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 for Self diagnostic error,
00 for no auto reboot and
6000 for Self diagnostic error
code.
The auto reboot function is
set in U287
Up to 8 times are recorded. Total page count at the time Item code for the Date and
All occurrences are displayed of a maintenance item maintenance replace (2 items time of
in case of less than 8 times. replace. for 1 byte value) occurrence
Number in ( ) is the color total
page counter First byte (Replacing item)
02: Maintenance kit
Second 1 byte (replacement
item type)
(Low-end model)
01: MK-8335A
02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01:MK-8525A
02:MK-8525B
6-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
No. Contents
(11) Toner Log
UP to 32 times are recorded. The total page count at the log code Date and
All occurrences are recorded time of toner container First 1 byte (Replacing item) time of
in case of less than 32 times. replacement. (both genuine occurrence
01: Genuine product
and non-genuine toner)
02: Non-genuine product
Number in ( ) is the color total
page counter.
Next 1 byte (type of
replacement item)
If installing the same toner
container twice or used toner 00: Black
container, all of them are 01: Cyan
counted. 02: Magenta
03: Yellow
Last 16 digits
Display the serial number of
the toner container.
• Next 3 digits
Toner remaining (%)
6-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
No. Contents
(12) Counter Log
(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for
maintenance Item
Indicate the log counter of Indicate the log counter of Indicate the log counter by Consist of
paper jams by causes. self diagnostics errors by the maintenance replacing three log
See Paper Jam Log. causes. items. counters,
paper jams,
self
Service call/System error T: Toner container
• All causes are diagnostics
includes a number of auto 00: Black
displayed even no errors, and
reboots either.
record. 01: Cyan maintenanc
02: Magenta e
replaceme
03: Yellow nt items.
(Example) CF245: 4 (2)
System Error 245 occurred
M: Maintenance kit
four times and auto reboot
twice. (Low-end model)
01: MK-8335A
02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01:MK-8525A
02:MK-8525B
Example: T00: 1
The toner container (Black)
replaced once.
6-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
(25) Availability of the Scan extension kit (A) Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(26) Print coverage Print Coverage provides just a reference of toner consumption
and is not actual toner consumption.
6-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
(36) RP code Coding the engine software version and the date of the latest
update.
Coding the main software version and the date of the latest
update.
Coding the main software version and the date of the previous
update.
(37) MP tray priority setting Off (No setting)/Auto (Auto paper feed)/Always (All times)
6-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/Primary
transfer unit/Secondary transfer roller unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/Developer unit Y/the main
charger roller K/the main charger roller C/the main charger
roller M/the main charger roller Y/Fuser unit/Fuser discharge
unit
(53) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(64) Job end detection mode 0: Detect as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detect as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a break in
job
6-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
(86) Shift limitation setting for one copy 0: Disable (Limitation OFF)
original. 1: Enable (Limitation ON)
6-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Exit the maintenance mode and return to the copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method
6-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Set the machine setting values to the factory default
Execution
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Mode1(All)].
Note
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization by using maintenance mode
U002 again.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Codes Contents
0002 Initialize failure of setting information
6-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Codes Contents
0019 Initialize failure of counter information by coverage/Job/CBM alert feeding
6-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set phone number that will be displayed at the service call error.
Purpose
Set telephone number for service call at the installation of machine.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set or display the machine serial number.
Purpose
Check the machine serial number
Execute in case of displaying “C0180 machine number mismatch" after replace main or engine PWB.
Important
Do not execute U004, or select [Execute] and press [Start] key, if machine serial number in
engine PWB is different from main unit serial number. Different machine serial number is
overwritten in the main PWB.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
In case of matching the machine serial number between engine PWB and main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Display the machine serial number.
In case that the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. (Main) Display the machine serial number in the main PWB.
Machine No. (Eng) Display the machine serial number in the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1 Select [Execute].
Note
Start serial number writing.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Changing the maintenance mode ID makes service activity more secure.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: New ID
1 Select [New ID].
Note
Either [*] or [#] must be included.
Method: Initialize
1 Select [Initialize].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
• Following error code come up in case that new ID has inappropriate manner.
Error code list
6-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Verify that the firmware is not falsified.
Purpose
Calculate the checksum and verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Items Contents
Expected Display the checksum expected value
2 Select [Execute].
f003 Injustice data in the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The firmware version is displayed.
OCR OCR
6-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Color Table1(Prn) Color table 1 firmware (Printer)
DP *2 DP firmware
DF *3 finisher firmware
PH *5
Punch firmware
MT *6 Mailbox Firmware
BF Boot *7 BF boot
6-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Application Name 11 Application 11 firmware
*1: Only if fax is installed/*2: Only if DP is installed (DP SSW is only for Multi feeding detection model)/*3: Only if DF is installed
*4: Only if DF (100 sheets staple) is install/*5: Only if PH is install/*6 Only if MT is installed/*7: Only if BF is installed
*8 Except 25 ppm model/*9: High-end model only
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Initialize all settings, except not adjustable setting such as each counter, service call error history and mode
setting. Also, initialize the backup RAM according to the settings selected in the maintenance mode U252
(Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except not adjustable settings in the field.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.
Note
All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.
2 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Note
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U021.
Error codes
Items Contents
0002 Initialize failure of setting information
6-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
0016 Initialize failure of log verification
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Important
The following settings are also initialized with this HDD initialize.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key,
Document Box, etc.), Shortcut key, Panel program.
The following installed firmwares are deleted with Full format function.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software, Color table.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
5 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
3 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Start operation
Note
Reinstall deleted firmware manually.
Optional language, OCR dictionary software, (OCRDATA): Install using USB drive.
Install the HyPAS application (FMU, etc.) from the Application screen.
Color table: Execute U485
Note
If there is no OCR dictionary software, a warning dialog is displayed, and the OCR function is unavailable.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Update firmware with USB drive in case of selecting security level “Very High” in the System Menu.
Supplement
Start the firmware updating by executing U025 with USB drive.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware
Note
This mode does not work without USB drive.
4 Turn the power switch off then on after completed. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restore the setting values that backup from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Transfer the backup data from origin SSD to destination SSD via USB drive.
Execution
1 Press [Start] key.
SSD Backup and restore SSD data when USB drive is installed.
Method:Flash
1 Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data
Method:SSD
1 Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Note
Indicate "NG" when completing abnormally.
Saved data:
U278 Delivery date setting
U402 margin adjustment
U952 Maintenance workflow data
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Drive each motor.
Purpose
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
DLP(K) Operate drum motor CMY, drum moter K, developer motor CMY, developer
motor K, transfer belt motor, belt cleaning motor or feed motor.
DLP(CMY)
Note
Press [Stop] key to quit operation.
6-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the on/off status of each switches and sensors that detect paper on the conveying path.
Purpose
Check if the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
• Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
• Indication of the switches turn to blue when the switches are on.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Display the switching status of the SSW 2 sensor
Belt Jam Display the switching status of the belt wound sensor
Bridge1 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Display the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Display the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
Setting: Setting
1 Select [Execute].
Method: Print
1 Select [Execute].
6-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Supply power and turn each clutch on.
Purpose
Check if each clutch works.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Press [Stop] key to quit operation.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Supply power and turn each clutch on.
Purpose
Check if each clutch works.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Press [Stop] key to quit operation.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Execute in case of a consistent error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Run in case of a consistent error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Start Position 3/4 Adjust the leading edge registration (3/4 speed)
Note
Pressing [System Menu] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
MPT Half(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half (L)
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
paper feed (L)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) paper feed Half (L)
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy (L)
6-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(S)
MPT Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half (S)
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
paper feed (S)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) paper feed Half (S)
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy (S)
Duplex Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copy Half (S)
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value in case of test chart 1.
Decrease the value in case of test chart 2.
The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034 > U066(P.6-73) > U071(P.6-79)
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
6-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
feed (L) when B/W copying
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the B/W -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (L)
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(S) when B/W copying
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
feed (S) when B/W copying
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the B/W -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (S)
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value in case of test chart 1.
Decrease the value in case of test chart 2.
The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034 > U066(P.6-73) > U071(P.6-79)
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
6-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
feed (L) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing when duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copying (L) at 3/4 speed
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(S) at 3/4 speed
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
feed (S) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing when duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copying (S) at 3/4 speed
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value in case of test chart 1.
Decrease the value in case of test chart 2.
The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034 > U066(P.6-73) > U071(P.6-74)
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
6-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Cassette1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette2 Adjust the center line for cassette 2 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette3 Adjust the center line for cassette 3 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed
Cassette4 Adjust the center line for cassette 4 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed
Cassette5 Adjust the center line for cassette 5 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed
Duplex Adjusting the center line when duplex copying -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(Back page)
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value in case of test chart 1.
Decrease the value in case of test chart 2.
The image moves to the right side by increasing setting value and moves to the left side by decreasing the
value.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2 mm)
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034 < U067(P.6-74) < U072(P.6-81)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Purpose
Set the actual size of Folio and avoid from image missing on the trailing edge or right/left edges.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Length Set the Folio paper length. 330 to 356 (mm) 330 1(mm)
Width Set the Folio paper width. 200 to 220 (mm) 210 1 mm
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Drive each fan.
Purpose
Check if each fan works.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the paper loop level.
Purpose
Adjust loop level in case of missing image or inconsistent on the leading edge, or Z-shape fold.
Or use for check/adjust skew feed.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Paper Loop Amount 3/4 Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
MPT Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray -30 to 20 1mm
feed (L) at half speed
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex -30 to 20 1mm
(L)
Duplex Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex -30 to 20 1mm
(L) at half speed
6-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
MPT Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray -30 to 20 1mm
feed (S) at half speed
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex -30 to 20 1mm
(S)
Duplex Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex -30 to 20 1mm
(S) at half speed
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
MPT(L) -4 -4 -4 -4 -3
MPT Half(L) -4 -3 -3 -3 -3
Cassette(L) -4 -4 -4 -5 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4 -4 -4
Half(L)
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -3 -3 -2
Duplex Half(L) -3 -2 -2 -2 -2
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4 -4 -3
MPT Half(S) -4 -3 -3 -3 -3
Cassette(S) -4 -4 -4 -5 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4 -4 -4
Half(S)
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -3 -3 -2
Duplex Half(S) -3 -2 -2 -2 -2
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
Increasing setting value makes high loop level and decreasing makes low loop level.
6-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to run a test copy.
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W -30 to 20 1mm
MP tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/W -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (S)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
MPT(L) -4 -6 -6 0 0
Cassette(L) -4 -7 -7 0 0
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -4 -4 -4
MPT(S) -4 -6 -6 0 0
Cassette(S) -4 -7 -7 0 0
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -4 -4 -4
6-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
Increasing setting value makes high loop level and decreasing makes low loop level.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP tray -30 to 20 1mm
feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (S)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
MPT(L) -4 -4 -4 -4 -5
Cassette(L) -5 -5 -5 -5 -4
Duplex(L) -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
6-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Cassette(S) -5 -5 -5 -5 -4
Duplex(S) -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
Increasing setting value makes high loop level and decreasing makes low loop level.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
Note
Press “+” gets motor slower and “-” gets it faster.
Execution
1 Press [Start] key.
Motor5 *1 Set developer K/Transfer belt motor in B/W high speed mode.
Motor6 *1 Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor in B/W high speed
mode.
Motor1 Half Set drum motor K, drum motor CMY in half speed mode.
Motor2 Half Set developer CMY, developer K/Transfer belt motor in half speed mode.
Motor3 Half Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor in half speed
mode.
Motor1 3/4 Set drum motor K, drum motor CMY in 3/4 speed mode.
Motor2 3/4 Set developer CMY, developer K/Transfer belt motor in 3/4 speed mode.
Motor3 3/4 Set exit, fuser, BR conveying, feed, PF feed (Optional) motor in 3/4 speed
mode.
6-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Motor1
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Drum(CMY) Adjust the drum motor (COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
Drum(K) 8 8 11 13 16
Setting: Motor2
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Dev(CMY) Adjust the developer motor(COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Dev(CMY) 0 0 0 0 0
Trans Belt 0 0 0 0 0
Setting: Motor3
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
SB Adjust the eject motor -5000 to 5000 -
6-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
SB 0 0 0 0 0
Exit 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge1 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 0 0 0 0 0
Feed 53 58 73 60 74
Option 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge1 DF 0 0 0 0 0
High
Bridge1 DF 0 0 0 0 0
Low
Bridge2 DF 0 0 0 0 0
High
Bridge2 DF 0 0 0 0 0
Low
Setting: Motor4
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Drum Mono(K) Adjust drum motor K in B/W mode (CMY -5000 to 5000 -
release)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Drum B/W(K) 0 - - - -
Drum Mono(K) 22 25 32 13 16
Setting: Motor5
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Trans Belt B/W Adjust developer K/Transfer belt motor in B/W -5000 to 5000 -
high speed mode.
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Trans Belt B/W 0 0 0 0 0
Setting: Motor6
1 Select the item to adjust.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
SB B/W Adjust exit motor in B/W high speed mode. -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing B/W Adjust fuser motor in B/W high speed mode. -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 B/W Adjust BR conveying motor in B/W high speed -5000 to 5000 -
mode.
6-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Option B/W Adjust PF feed motor (Optional) in B/W high -5000 to 5000 -
speed mode.
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
SB 0 - - - -
Fixing -105 - - - -
Bridge1 0 - - - -
Bridge2 0 - - - -
Feed 65 - - - -
Option B/W 0 - - - -
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Drum(CMY) Adjust the drum motor (COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Drum(CMY) 16 16 22 22 22
Drum(K) 16 16 22 22 22
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Trans Belt 0 0 0 0 0
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
SB Adjust the exit motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Exit *1 Adjust the exit rear motor in half speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the paper feed motor in half speed -5000 to 5000 -
mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
SB 0 0 0 0 0
Exit - - - 0 0
Bridge1 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 0 0 0 0 0
6-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Option 0 0 0 0 0
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Drum(CMY) Adjust the developer motor (CMY) in 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -
speed mode
Drum(K) Adjust the drum motor (K) in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Drum(CMY) 11 11 16 16 22
Drum(K) 11 11 16 16 22
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Dev(CMY) Adjust the developer motor (CMY) in 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -
speed mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Dev(CMY) 0 0 0 0 0
Trans Belt 0 0 0 0 0
6-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
SB Adjust the exit motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjust the fuser motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Exit *1 Adjust the exit rear motor in 3/4 speed mode -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjust the paper feed motor in 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
mode
Option Adjust the motors for the optional device in 3/ -5000 to 5000 -
4 speed mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
SB 0 0 0 0 0
Exit - - - 0 0
Bridge1 0 0 0 0 0
Bridge2 0 0 0 0 0
Feed 49 49 70 70 97
Option 0 0 0 0 0
Note
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode when
executing this maintenance mode.
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set condition for the cooling mode in which drive all fans.
Purpose
Set the temperature that gets start the cooling mode in which drive all fans when external temperature gets high in
continuous printing.
Setting
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Cooling Mode Set the Cooling Mode -3 to 3 ℃
Initial setting
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Turn on the exposure lamp.
Purpose
Turn on the exposure lamp for checking.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
CIS Turn the CIS lamp on (when the dual scanning is available)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Change the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute when the vertical void area appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning the shading
plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where is no influence of dirt or scratch on the shading
plate.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Position Changes the scanner shading position 0 to 18 0 0.16mm
Increasing the set value have the shading position move toward the left side of main frame and decreasing
have it move toward the right.
Note
Test copy is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode while this maintenance mode
is running.
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the equal magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning in case of incorrect.
Purpose
Adjust the equal magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning in case of incorrect.
Important
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks
depending on the original document.
Follow the orders below in case of an adjustment in time of scanning.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-71)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-71)
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub- -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction
6-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Execute in case of a consistent error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-48) > U065(P.6-71) > U066
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Run this mode in case of a consistent error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
5 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 1.
Increase the value for the copy sample 2.
The image moves to the left side by increasing setting value and moves to the right side by decreasing the
value.
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image still have a problem, attempt those
maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-48) > U065(P.6-71) > U067
6-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used
Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test copy 0 to 3 0 -
originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1 Select [DP Read].
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
3 The image moves backward by increasing setting value and moves forward by decreasing the value.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
4 Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
6 Run the test copy at each scanning position which are 0 to 3 and check if no black line appears and the image
is normally scanned.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the equal-magnification for DP.
Purpose
Adjust if the equal magnification is incorrect in the main and sub scanning direction with DP.
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
Sub Scan (B) *1 Adjust the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning
Main Scan (CIS) Adjust the 2nd side magnification in the main 0 to 75 0 0.02%
*2 scanning direction when duplex scanning (DP CIS)
Sub Scan (CIS) Adjust the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
*2 scanning direction when duplex scanning (DP CIS)
7 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
Increasing the setting value makes the image long, and decreasing makes it short.
6-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjust if observed consistent error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image from
DP scan.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
DP-7110/7130
CIS Head Adjust the leading edge timing for the DP CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
CIS Tail Adjust the trailing edge timing for the DP CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
6-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
DP-7120
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -27 to 27 0 0.12 mm
Important
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following
in the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-48) > U071
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjust if observed consistent error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image from
DP scan.
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
7 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 1.
Increase the value for the copy sample 2.
The image moves to the left side by increasing setting value and moves to the right side by decreasing the
value.
6-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Important
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following
in the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-48) > U065(P.6-71) > U067(P.6-74) > U072
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit glass.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Select [Execute].
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 (%) 100 1%
6-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Set the image density correction for scanning
Purpose
Change the setting when the gray background appears by scanning bluish original or originals with slightly dark
background Adjust the image difference between the table scanning and DP scanning DP CIS scanning is not
available.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Coefficient Density correction for DP image scanning 0: No correction 0
1: Low-level
correction
2: Middle-level
DP Color Set permission for the DP color registration correction 1: On 1
Regist operation 2: Off
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the scanned data of original trailing edge with the scanned data after the
original feed, change the scan position for next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measure for the black lines that happen with dust on the original scanning position, in case
of using the document processor.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Front Set the scanning data threshold on the face 0 to 128 48
Back Set the scanning data threshold on the back in duplex 0 to 128 48
mode
Note
Decreasing the value makes dust detection frequently since dark image is detected as dust also.
If the set value is increased, dust detection becomes less likely.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG chart generated by the main unit.
Purpose
Run this mode is to check main frame conditions except scanning section in time of adjusting scan setting, by
using the MIP-PG chart that is output without scan process.
Note
Output in Maintenance mode such as test chart never affect print coverage and counter on Service status
page.
Method
1 Select the MIP-PG chart to output
White
White(Color)
6-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Gray(C) For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
Sample Set Output the following charts for the long life unit warranty application
PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four color PG)
For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
For drum quality check (Magenta PG)
For drum quality check (Gray PG)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set threshold for error detection threshold in void lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count result.
Purpose
Execute in case of replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variati
on
Coefficient(R) Display the red pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Note
Do not change the initial threshold 112 basically.
Increase the value when void lines appear even if the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Decrease the value when thin lines disappear in any types of original.
Set it in between 50 and 200. (Out of range may affect an image output)
Method: Execute
1 Select [Execute].
5 Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
6-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Black line Void lines DP CIS roller/ Execute the U091 CIS roller/glass contamination
Glass
contamination
Black line No lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
No lines Void lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Check the original size detection and set the detection threshold
Purpose
Change the threshold when the original size is often missed because of entirely dark originals (high density) or
originals that has dark edges.
Change the threshold
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Data2 Display the original width of Original Area color (The document processor is
installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
4 The light source turn on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. The original size sensor detects the
original lengthwise. (Detect twice if the document processor is installed)
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Original Detected number of pixels in the original width 0 to 7352 - 1dot
Area(dot)
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Note
Decreasing the setting value makes the sensor's sensitivity high and allows to detect high density originals but
the original mat may be detected as an original.
Detection error may occur in any positions of original when values are too much difference each other.
1 2 3 2 2 B6R㹼A4R 5.5"㹼8.5"
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Set DC Bias Before Display the main charge DC bias correction value for each color. (Adjusted
value before correction)
Set DC Bias After Display the main charge DC bias base value for each color. (Adjusted value
after correction)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting value makes the image density light, and decreasing makes it dark.
Set value is variable depending on the environment.
In case that [AC Auto Adj] is on, this function works in conditions and adjust to proper value automatically.
In case that [AC Auto Adj] is off, keep the changed value unless change it manually.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
AC Bias(K) Black main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1040
6-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting: On
DC1 Bias(C) Base of cyan main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Base of magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Base of yellow main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting value makes the image density light, and decreasing makes it dark.
Developer bias leaking (High model), carrier developing (Low model) may occur by increasing too much high.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
DC2 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0
DC2 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0
DC2 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias additional value (Full -200 to 200 0
speed)
DC2 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -200 to 200 0
6-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting value makes the image density light, and decreasing makes it dark.
The setting is effective when [AC Auto Adj] is off.
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
DC Bias(K) 370 370 370 1200 1200
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Interference fringes may occur by changing the setting.
Items Contents Setting range
High *1 Set the frequency of the main charger (High speed) 2000 to 3300
Generally Set the frequency of the main charger (Normal speed) 2000 to 3300
3/4 Set the frequency of the main charger (3/4 speed) 2000 to 3300
Half Set the frequency of the main charger (Half speed) 2000 to 3300
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Generally 2362 2992 2362 - -
6-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting
Setting: Value
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Multiple Value Charge Multiplication value 0.8 to 1.3 1.0
6-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Prohibit Reflection Set the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Env adj prohibit Set prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer feedback
Setting: Voltage
1 Press [Start] key.
Value 2nd Set the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
Setting: Target
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
K Black primary transfer feedback voltage target 0 to 290 70 -
6-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Step
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Step Primary transfer feedback voltage atep 0 to 290 30 -
Setting: Value
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
Constant speed)
6-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Normal(K) 199 194 180 138 130
6-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
Constant speed)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Normal(K) 184 179 166 136 127
6-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
K -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
C -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
M -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
Y -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
6-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
K -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
C -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
M -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
Y -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
Setting: Current
1 Press [Start] key.
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variati
on
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
6-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Normal(K) 242 223 174 90 77
Half(C) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(M) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(Y) 91 85 65 53 53
6-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variati
on
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Normal(K) 165 155 119 87 74
6-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Half(K) 93 87 67 54 54
Half(C) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(M) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(Y) 93 87 67 54 54
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variati
on
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
6-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Normal(K) 242 223 174 90 77
Half(C) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(M) 95 88 68 56 56
Half(Y) 91 85 65 53 53
6-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variati
on
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Normal(K) 165 155 119 87 74
6-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Half(K) 93 87 67 54 54
Half(C) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(M) 89 83 64 54 54
Half(Y) 87 81 62 51 51
Off Set of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback result
Off Set of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer feedback:
Off
6-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Note
Test copy is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode while this maintenance mode
is running.
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Light/Normal1
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) 1st side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) 2nd side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
1st B/W *1 1st side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2nd B/W *1 2nd side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
6-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variatio
n
Width=105 Set paper width=105 2 to 200 1[uA]
[1st]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 132 120 91 84 69
Width=210 102 93 69 65 54
Width=297 71 65 50 50 41
[2nd]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 166 158 126 121 98
Width=297 66 61 48 49 41
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 91 91 64 48 39
Width=210 69 69 48 41 35
Width=297 50 50 35 39 33
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 118 118 82 77 50
Width=210 81 81 57 47 46
Width=297 48 48 34 28 29
6-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
[1st B/W]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 132 0 0 - -
Width=210 102 0 0 - -
Width=297 71 0 0 - -
[2nd B/W]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 166 140 111 - -
Width=297 100 93 87 - -
Setting: Normal2/3
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) 1st side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) 2nd side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
1st B/W *1 1st side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2nd B/W *1 2nd side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variatio
n
Width=105 Set paper width=105 2 to 200 1[uA]
6-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
[1st]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 132 120 91 84 69
Width=210 102 93 69 65 54
Width=297 71 65 50 50 41
[2nd]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 166 158 126 121 98
Width=297 66 61 48 49 41
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 91 91 64 48 39
Width=210 69 69 48 41 35
Width=297 50 50 35 39 33
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 118 118 82 77 50
Width=210 81 81 57 47 46
Width=297 48 48 34 28 29
[1st B/W]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 132 0 0 - -
Width=210 102 0 0 - -
Width=297 71 0 0 - -
6-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
[2nd B/W]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 166 0 0 - -
Width=210 114 0 0 - -
Width=297 71 0 0 - -
Setting: Heavy1
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 3/4 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
[1st 3/4]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 91 91 64 37 36
Width=210 69 69 48 31 30
Width=297 50 50 35 31 30
[2nd 3/4]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 118 118 82 49 49
Width=210 81 81 57 45 45
Width=297 48 48 34 26 26
6-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Heavy2/3
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variatio
n
Width=105 Set paper width=105 2 to 200 1[uA]
[1st Half]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 56 52 40 33 33
Width=210 46 42 32 29 29
Width=297 45 42 32 27 27
[2nd Half]
Initial setting
]
Width=210 71 65 50 40 40
Width=297 40 37 28 23 23
Setting: Heavy4/5
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
6-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variatio
n
Width=105 Set paper width=105 2 to 200 1[uA]
[1st Half]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 56 52 40 38 38
Width=210 46 42 32 26 26
Width=297 45 42 32 26 26
[2nd Half]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 77 71 55 48 48
Width=210 71 65 50 36 36
Width=297 40 37 28 26 26
Setting: OHP
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variatio
n
Width=105 Set paper width=105 2 to 200 1[uA]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Width=105 60 56 43 35 35
Width=210 51 4 37 30 30
Width=297 40 37 29 29 29
6-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Bias
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Reverse Reverse bias setting (Full speed) 0 to 200 -
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Reverse 0 0 0 0 0
Reverse Half 0 0 0 0 0
Reverse 3/4 0 0 0 0 0
Reverse B/W 0 0 0 - -
Cleaning 67 62 48 38 31
Cleaning Half 50 46 36 29 23
Cleaning 3/4 56 52 40 32 26
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Belt(A)/(B): Set the transfer belt cleaning control voltage
1St sheet CLN B/W: Printing size gets off from cleaning position.
Purpose
Belt(A): Change the setting when offset images appear because of the transfer belt cleaning failure.
1St sheet CLN B/W: Set if transfer belt cleaning failure happen only in the first page for continuous B/W printing.
Note
First copy time gets slower with this function.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
1st sheet CLN B/W *1 Set cleaning mode after B/W printing
Setting: Belt(A)
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
6-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Full 15 15 15 30 25
Half 10 10 10 21 21
B/W *1 15 15 15 - -
3/4 10 10 10 24 25
Setting: Belt(B)
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Full 15 15 15 30 25
Half 10 10 10 21 21
B/W 15 15 15 - -
3/4 10 10 10 24 25
6-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Note
Test copy is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode while this maintenance mode
is running.
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Separation shift bias OFF timing
Purpose
Change the setting value if paper separation failure occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Output
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting for 0 to 60 1[uA]
front side of light paper at full
speed
Add Normal Lead Additive setting for the leading -60 to 60 1[uA]
edge of normal paper
6-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Light 1st 20 17 14 5 5
Light 2nd 20 17 14 5 5
Normal 1st 5 5 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5 5 5
Heavy/OHP 0 0 0 0 0
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Data
variatio
n
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting for front side of light 0 to 60 1[uA]
paper at full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting for back side of light 0 to 60 1[uA]
paper at full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting for front side of 0 to 60 1[uA]
normal paper at full speed
Normal 2nd Separation shift bias setting for back side of 0 to 60 1[uA]
normal paper at full speed
Initial setting
Output 3/4
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Light 1st 14 14 14 5 5
Light 2nd 14 14 14 5 5
Normal 1st 5 5 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 5 5 5 5 5
Output B/W
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Light 1st 20 17 14 5 5
Light 2nd 20 17 14 5 5
Normal 1st 5 5 5 5 5
Normal 2nd 0 0 0 5 5
6-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Timing
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
On Timing Lead Separation shift bias ON timing -200 to 200 -20 1mm
at the leading edge
Note
Test copy is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode while this maintenance mode
is running.
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum counter
Completion
6-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the LSU driving time.
Purpose
Use for check LSU life or change/reset
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the count.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the LSU drive time
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the drum number.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum number
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Select the item to refer to.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum history
Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the initial LSU laser power based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Send the drum sensitivity data in EEPROM to engine PWB and correct LSU
laser power.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Display the drum drive distance counter.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the count.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan drum drive distance counter
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Display the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the primary transfer unit number
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Display the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Confirm the machine number and primary transfer unit counter
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine Number history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verify the primary/secondary transfer unit counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Display the primary transfer counts
Mid Trans(Time) Display the primary transfer unit drive time counts
2nd Trans(Time) Display the primary transfer unit drive time counts
Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up by the drum.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Data
range variatio
n
On Timing 1st 1st side transfer On timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 ms
value
Off Timing Transfer Off timing adjustment value -200 to 200 0.1mm
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
On Timing 1st 72 72 71 70 70
On Timing 2nd 72 72 71 70 70
Off Timing 10 13 16 20 20
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Adjust the the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values can not be read correctly because of EEPROM failure, use manual adjustment and fix control
value temporary.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Auto
1 The current setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Default(C) Toner sensor C default control voltage
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is often detected.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Installs toner
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
Important
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner
inside and it may lock up.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of toner near end earlier than the current setting if user feels it is too short between near end
and empty.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
Note
The setting value can not work if the change has done while “Toner Low” is already displaying.
Main switch has to be turned on and off in case of changing the value while “Toner Low” is already displaying.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display internal and external temperature, and external humidity.
Purpose
Check internal and external temperature, and external humidity.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Ext/Int
1 Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (℃)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Method: LSU
1 Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanner Unit (℃)
Method: Developing
1 Display the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (℃)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the developer bias set values or Set high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias values.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Mag DC Offset *1 Set offset value of the developer magnet roller DC bias.
6-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Sleeve DC
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
]
Initial setting
On Off
C *1 Cyan developer sleeve DC bias setting 0 to 100 50 60
Setting: Sleeve AC
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
]
Initial
Items Contents Setting range
setting
C *1 Cyan developer sleeve AC bias setting 1000 to 1900 1400
High *2 Developer sleeve AC bias setting (High speed) 1000 to 1900 1400
6-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Mag DC
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
C Cyan developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150∼500 360 *2
350 *3
High *1 Developer magnet roller DC bias setting (High 150 to 500 360
speed)
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only
Setting: Mag AC
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
High-end Model
]
Initial setting
On Off
C Cyan developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200 2000
M Magenta developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200 2000
Y Yellow developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200 2000
K Black developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2000 2000
High *1 Developer magnet roller AC bias setting (High 1500 to 2800 2000 2000
speed)
Low-end model
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
C Cyan developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 1200
CMY CMY developer magnet roller AC bias setting 400 to 1400 1200
6-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting
range
CMY *1 CMY developer sleeve roller frequency setting (Full 3500 to 4900
speed)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35
ppm
CMY 4000 4189 4000
High 4710 - -
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting
range
CMY *1 CMY developer sleeve roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99
speed)
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35
ppm
CMY 43 43 40
K 43 43 40
High 43 - -
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
CMY *1 CMY developer magnet roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 68
speed)
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only
Setting: AC Calib
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
Setup at high altitude
When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
When the developer leakage occurs
When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibration
Setting: Calibration
1 Select the item to set.
3 Select [Execute].
6-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
5 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Note
An error code appears when there is an error.
Setting: Magnification
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range
C Set for Cyan developing leak outbreak -10 to 15
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35
ppm
C 11 11 7
M 11 11 7
Y 11 11 7
K 11 11 7
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
Copy Set the copy image density -1 to 1 0
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Half
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
K Developer magnet roller DC offset (K) -100 to 0 -20
Setting: 3/4
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
K Developer magnet roller DC offset (K) -100 to 0 -10
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Mode selection for removing overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode). Also, Set the
operation that is to take back accumulated toner on the developer blade to the developer unit (vibration motor
control).
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute to change the vibration motor control frequency.
Important
Image density gets lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Upper limit Set the upper coverage limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing
1 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
Job End Set the toner apply count (job end) 1 to 255 12
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Initial setting: On
6-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Value 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variati
on
Mode Set Auto drum refresh 0:Off *2 2 1
1: Short
2: Standard
3: Long
Void line Aging Set the void line prevention aging 0: Off 0 1
*1 1: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the toner sensor output
Purpose
Check output value by each color when an image failure occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Toner Display the toner sensor value and supply level value for each color
Method: Toner
1 Display the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor(C) Display the deference between cyan toner sensor output value and target
Sensor(M) Display the deference between magenta toner sensor output value and target
Sensor(Y) Display the deference between yellow toner sensor output value and target
Sensor(K) Display the deference between black toner sensor output value and target
Method: Calibration
1 Display each setting values.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Display the waste toner weight detection sensor output value
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display and adjust the toner supply level for each color.
Purpose
Display and adjust the toner empty level for each color.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Display the toner empty level
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the developer drive time to refer for the toner concentration control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the developer drive time.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit drive time.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
C Display the cyan developer counter.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Set container cover setting and guidance display for lock release or waste toner for black toner bottle.
Purpose
This mode is to set container cover setting and guidance display for lock release. Or change setting for black
toner container as waste toner bottle.
Note
In case that container cover lock release regularly, set it disable.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Note
Setting Off gets all container cover open when front cover open.
6-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting:
100V model: Off
120V model: On
220V-240V Machine: On
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variati
on
Message Set the message display to replace the waste On/Off *1 -
toner box with the BK toner container
Waste Toner Level Set the waste toner amount to display message 0 to 20 20 10%
*2 and stop job.
Note
Ether waste toner replace message comes up or stops job, unless waste toner is below the waste toner level
setting at timing of toner empty. (Replace message comes up if it is above the setting.)
Turn off/on message comes up after setting.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the fuser temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl, creases and
fusing failure on thick paper.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Warm Up
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range
Ready(Center) Control temperature at displaying Ready 100 to 200
(Center)
6-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Initial setting
100V
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Ready(Center) 160 155 135 135 130
Ready(Press) 30 30 30 20 20
Low Power 85 85 85 85 85
(Center)
11 (120V)
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Ready(Center) 170 165 145 145 140
Ready(Press) 40 40 40 30 30
Low Power 85 85 85 85 85
(Center)
220-240V
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Ready(Center) 170 165 145 145 140
Ready(Press) 40 40 40 30 30
Low Power 85 85 85 85 85
(Center)
6-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Print
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range
Full Speed Shift Temperature at maximum print speed (Center) 100 to 200
(Center)
Initial setting
100V
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Full Speed Shift 170 165 155 150 145
(Center)
Shift(Center) 0 0 0 0 0
120/220-240V
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
Full Speed Shift 180 175 165 160 155
(Center)
Shift(Center) 0 0 0 0 0
6-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Display the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser counter values.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the fuser counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Display the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the fuser unit number.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display and clear the fuser count, fuser discharge needle bias correction counter.
Purpose
Verify the fuser count after replacement. Also, clear the bias correction counts after replacing IH unit, fuser
discharge needle.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the fuser count
Correction Display and change the fuser discharge needle bias correction counter.
Setting; Correction
1 Select [Correction].
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Display and set the control voltage of the IH PWB.
Purpose
Check the control voltage
When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Items Contents
Set Fuser Destination setting for Fuser
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display and set bias value for fuser belt charging needle
Purpose
Check or set bias current value for fuser belt surface as corrective measure for fuser static offset that comes from
over charge on fuser belt.
Important
Increasing the value reduce sticking toner on the fuser belt, but pay attention that too much
change gets the charging needle to stick organic substance and it makes the static offset.
In case that this adjustment does not work, replace the fuser discharge unit and clear the
count with U167.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Items Contents
Bias Display and set bias value for fuser belt charging needle
Initial setting
Items 60 ppm 50 ppm 40/35 32 ppm 25 ppm
ppm
B/W 20 20 20 20 20
Color 20 20 20 20 20
3/4 20 20 20 20 20
Half 20 20 20 20 20
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Change fuser control setting
Purpose
Change fuser control setting in case that the security gate affects to fuser control.
Specific destination (100V model)
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Items Contents
Security Gate Prevent malfunction of security gate
Security gate
Direct Path
Swept Transmitter Signal
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
6-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge1 Display the heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Center Display the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Middle Display the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Press Roller Center Display the press roller center temperature (°C)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
All the LEDS on the operation panel are lit.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation panel LED lighting.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust touch screen detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and check the touchscreen detecting points, after the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or
when the detecting points are not aligned.
Note
In case that not able to get into Maintenance mode because of misalignment, press key behind operation panel
for more than 3 seconds and start U201.
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode Active U201
Initialize Touch Panel
Initialize
Check
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Initialize
6-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6 [Initialize Completed] appears after setting and the touch screen is automatically corrected.
Initialize completed.
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1 Press the center of indicated three "+", and then check the display position.
Initialize
6-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Check that the gap of the X and Y axis of the displayed coordinate is 6 or less.
(13, -3)
Initialize
Multi Tap
Check
(4, -1)
Note
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press [Start] key to return to Step.1.
Initialize
Initialize
6-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Step 1 : Completed.
Step 2 : Completed.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P)*1 Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)
CIS(Non-P)*2 Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS (continuous operation)
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
6-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Reset
1 Select [Execute].
Method: Result
1 Select [Result].
Display the conveying timing data.
Items Contents
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Message * Set the message indicated when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1 Select the type of the optional counter.
Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Setting: Message
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Key Device Prioritized display of the key device on the login screen when multiple devices
are used.
Coin Vendor Prioritized display of the coin vendor on the login screen when multiple devices
are used .
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Set the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, Set the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is installed. (This is an
optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines.)
Purpose
Run this maintenance item if a coin vendor is installed.
Method
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Setting: No Coin Action
6-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Price
1 Select the item to set.
]
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
Setting: Normal / AD
1 Select the item to set.
]Items Contents
B/W Black & White
2 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
]Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Setting: Print
1 Select the item to set.
]Items Contents
B/W Black & White
3 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
6-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10 50
Setting: Apl
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
]Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
Apl1 Expanded charging unit 1 0 to 300 10
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1 Press [Start] key to display execution window.
2 [Count 0] appears and turn on the LED in the leftmost row on operation panel.
3 Count up as pressing keys in order from the top in the leftmost row, and once press all keys in the row, next
row to the right turn on if available.
The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Set the size of paper used in Side Paper Feeder
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side paper feeder or the size of paper used in the side paper feeder is
changed.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
*: Only for large capacity feeder (1,650 sheet x2) and side feeder (3,500 sheet x1).
Setting
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side paper feeder: A4
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute the inner job separator installation setting.
Purpose
Execute when installing the inner job separator.
Make sure to set to [Off] to prevent wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Installing the inner job separator
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. The device connected to the USB host can not be recognized when it
is ON.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
5 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
This mode is to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the users other
than administrator privileges.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution setting and
Paper settings
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Change the image data and the message for the opening screen at the startup and theimage data and for the
service call screen to specified data.
Purpose
This mode is to customize a display as user's preference.
Setting
1 Write the image data or the message data to the USB drive.
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive area)
6-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Note
Supplement 1: Displaying Startup screen
An installed graphic file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call screen
An installed graphic file is displayed at service call.
How to change the message
Enter 4 letters “#562” using the numeric keypad during a service call display and service call messages 1 and
2 show up.
How to reset the message display
Back to the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous one.
Important
The graphic file for startup screen must be opaque, because it may overlap on the
background at recovering from sleeping.
UP to 4 MB in total size can be installed.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem occurrence.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Display the document processor serial number.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Main Tray Set the main tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
5 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Main Tray
Input value 4000-sheet finisher DF-7130 "100 sheet 1000-sheet finisher
staple finisher"
0 4000 sheets 4000 sheets 1000 sheets
Middle Tray
Input value 4000-sheet finisher DF-7130 "100 sheet 1000-sheet finisher
staple finisher"
0 65 sheets 500 sheets 50 sheets
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Turn the finisher's motors and solenoids on.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's motors and solenoids operation check.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Motor
1 Select the item to operate.
6-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
B Tray Eject (H) *3 Drive the DF tray exit motor at high speed.
B Tray Eject (L) *3 Drive the DF tray exit motor at low speed.
6-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Match Pressure *3 Drive the match pressure motor
*1; Only for 4000 sheets DF, *2: Except Inner DF, *3: Only for 100 sheets staple
Press [Stop] key to quit operation.
Method: Solenoid
1 Select the item to operate.
*1; Only for 4000 sheets DF, *2: Except Inner DF, *3: Only for 100 sheets staple
Press [Stop] key to quit operation.
Method: Booklet
1 Select the item to operate.
6-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the status of finisher's switches and sensors operation.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Mail Box Check the mail box switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
1 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
6-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover sensor
6-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Bundle Eject HP2*5 Bundle exit HP sensor 2
*1; Only for 4000 sheets DF, *2: Only for 1000 sheet DF, *3: Except inner DF, *4: Only for inner DF, *5: Only for
100 sheets staple
6-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Booklet
1 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
6-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Punch
1 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Punch HP *1 PH home position sensor
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
• Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in Z-shape in the punch mode.
• Stop timing adjustment of punch position
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the punch mode.
• Center position timing adjustment
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the punch mode.
• Home position adjustment of front/rear width alignment.
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
• Home postilion adjustment of front/rear shift
No width alignment in ejected paper
• Home position adjustment of front/rear staple
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
• Adjustment of relief drum
In case 2-ply or triply sheets on the relief drum are shifted, adjust it.
• Pull-in timing and amount adjustment
Adjust the leading edge timing of up to the 3rd sheet and 4th sheet and after
• Front/Rear bind staple adjustment
Adjust the front/rear staple position if it is different from the specified in the staple mode
• Punch entry registration thick paper correction
Adjust the skew conveying or punch position shift on thick paper in the PH mode
• Home position adjustment of upper/lower side width alignment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
• Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjust the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of center folding position
Adjust the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjust the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of bundle down position
Adjust the position of the BF lower moving plate according to paper length
6-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Finisher
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Save Drum(2nd C)*3 Relief drum adjustment value (3rd sheet confluence)
*1; Only for 4000 sheets DF, *2: Except Inner DF, *3: Only for 100 sheets staple
6-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjusting the punch registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0.15 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjusting the punch stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.30 mm *1
0.50 mm *2
6-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Punch center position timing adjustment -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
Increase the set value if the punch position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the punch position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Center line
Sample 1 Sample 2
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Front width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.1 mm
4 Press [Stop] key and return to the screen for selecting the maintenance item number.
6 The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
7 Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
6-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjustment of front shift home position -30 to 30 0 0.1 mm
4 Press [Stop] key and return to the screen for selecting the maintenance item number.
Setting: Staple HP
1 Select [Staple HP].
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Front/rear staple home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.19 mm
Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
6-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Relief drum adjustment value (2nd sheet entry) -15∼15 0 0.15 mm
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Relief drum adjustment value (3rd sheet confluence) -15∼15 0 0.15 mm
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Relief drum adjustment value (3rd sheet confluence) -15∼15 0 0.15 mm
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Pulling start timing 0 to 30 0 2 msec
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Pulling level adjustment 0 to 30 0 2 msec
6-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Pulling start timing (Confluence) 0 to 30 0 2 msec
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Pulling level adjustment (Confluence) 0 to 30 0 2 msec
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Front bind adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.19 mm
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Back bind adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.19 mm
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Punch entry registration thick paper correction -20 to 20 0 0.15 mm
6-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Booklet
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjustment of upper side registration home position -15∼15 0 0.10 mm
4 Press [Stop] key and return to the screen for selecting the maintenance item number.
6 The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
7 Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
6-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter -15∼15 0 0.32 mm
size
Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -15∼15 0 0.32 mm
Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3mm
A
6-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Adjustment of tri- folding position -15∼15 0 0.32 mm
Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Bundle down position adjust value -15∼15 0 0.32 mm
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: 2PF
1 Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
2 Select [Execute].
Setting: LCF
1 Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
6-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Display Contents
Feed2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
2 Select [Execute].
2 Select [Execute].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
M.Cnt A Changes the maintenance counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 600000
200000 *1
M.Cnt B Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit B) 0 to 9999999 600000
200000 *1
M.Cnt D *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit D) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt E *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit E) 0 to 9999999 600000
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side paper feeder only
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display, clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting
range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side paper feeder only
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or
initialization
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Inch *2 Inch
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode
U252.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
6-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as one
sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Mono Color *1 Switch the counter for mono color (Single/Double Count)
Initial setting:
SGL(All) (100V machine), DBL(A3/Ledger) (120V/220-240V machine)
*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035. However, the
double count will be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or longer.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents
No. Display the OEM code
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
Note
If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Banner A Count setting of Long Paper A (470.1mm to 2 to 30 2 -
915mm/18.51” to 36”)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the single color count mode
Purpose
Execute to change the billing counter to count up in the single color mode.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Mode1 Count the single color count in the single color counter
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Today].
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set China Red
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the 2-color copy.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the contents of Service status that is printed from system menu.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Coverage
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Display the digital dot coverage.
Initial setting: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Add/Delete/Change the optional language
Purpose
Set the optional languages selectable from System Menu
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
Purpose
Set the automatic recovery function after the service call error or system error
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
C1XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C1xxx code
service call error
C2XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C2xxx code
service call error
C3XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C3xxx code
service call error
C4XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C4xxx code
service call error
C5XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C5xxx code
service call error
C6XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C6xxx code
service call error
C7XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C7xxx code
service call error
C8XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C8xxx code
service call error
C9XXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C9xxx code
service call error
CFXXX Set whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the CF code service
call error
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the notification of abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Initial setting: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the print interval at high coverage.
Purpose
Changes the print interval at high coverage.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Interval Set On/Off of print interval at high coverage. On/Off Off
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set indication of the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Display the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the contact glass when
scanning from the document processor.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Initial setting: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Selects the cassette heater control setting
Set the cassette heater for the optional cassette.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in
relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Mode Switch full-color count and color coverage count 0: Full color 0
display 1: by coverage
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Set the drum heater
Purpose
Set the drum heater setting display and drum heater setting in System Menu
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: System
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled
Off Disabled
Caution
If select [Off] in [System Menu], [Drum Heater] is also [Off], however [System] can not be [On] even if [Drum
Heater] is [On] in condition that [System] is [Off].
6-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Mode0: Environmental correction mode
Mode 1: Blurred image prevention priority mode
Items Contents
Mode 0 Environmental correction mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Allocate memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct printing occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage. (recommended value)
Image : +100
The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it cannot be used for
copy.
• Cassette designated for FAX on system menu can not be set.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Sett the frequently used settings depending on the user’s usage.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by setting the number of
prints that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Display the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value before the
maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Cnt Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of prints that can be made before
the current maintenance cycle reaches)
SSD Life Setting the maintenance time precaution display for the 0 to 99 5(%)
SSD replacement.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Initial setting: On
Sleep mode can not work from system menu if disable this function.
Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off
6-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Off Fuser gets off 1 or 2 min (*1) later from job end.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Note
If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second page.
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
6 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge margin(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
A
Left margin Right margin
(4.0 mm or less) (4.0 mm or less)
6-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Important
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following
maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-48) > U402
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
6 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting value makes the margin wider, and decreasing makes it narrow.
Leading edge margin(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
A
Left margin Right margin
(4.0 mm or less) (4.0 mm or less)
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following
in the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-48) > U402(P.6-243) > U403
6-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the document processor
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjust the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
A Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP left margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP leading edge margin (2nd 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
side)
C Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP right margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin (2nd 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
side)
6 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting value makes the margin wider, and decreasing makes it narrow.
Leading edge margin(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
A
Left margin Right margin
(4.0 mm or less) (4.0 mm or less)
6-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following
in the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-48) > U402(P.6-243) > U403(P.6-245) > U404
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust write timing for copy with 180 rotation original.
Purpose
Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner reading
image (image on the memory)
Important
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-48) > U402(P.6-243) > U66(P.6-73) >
U403(P.6-245) > U71(P.6-79) > U404(P.6-247) > U407
Adjustment
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
6 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Increase the value for the copy sample 1.
Decrease the value for the copy sample 2.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value
is decreased.
6-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment
4 Place the test chart 1 on to platen glass table with face down and arrow side far.
• Put approximately 20 sheets of white paper on to the chart.
6 Once [OK] comes up then continue with chart 2 and 3 repeating step 2 to 3.
6-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning
sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/sub
scanning direction, MTF correction, color/B/W input gamma, color correction matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF correction, Input
gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
6-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
CIS matrix
Use when setting up Input gamma in B/W mode
DP or executing
U021 initialization
DP FU(ChartB) Use when setting up Execute the 1st side automatic 302AC68243
*1 DP or executing adjustment in the DP scanning section.
U021 initialization Execute the 2nd side automatic
DP FD(ChartB) adjustment in the DP scanning section.
*2
Magnification in the sub-scanning
direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
*1: DP installed machine only, *2: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP machine only
6-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [Table(ChartA)].
7 Press [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
Note
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the
barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [Table(ChartA)].
Note
If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjusting it with
ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
DP adjustment original (ChartB)
6-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
PP
sPP
sPP
Method: DP FD (Chart B)
Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
3 Set the adjustment original output on the table and press [Start] key.
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
7 Press [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
Note
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the
barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
7 Press [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
Note
When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the
barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
4 Select [Target].
6-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
5 Select [U425].
Note
When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs during auto
adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case, check the error and execute the
automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action
00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error Set the original correctly and execute
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the sub- the adjustment again.
scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in the Check the attachment position of DP.
main scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in the Check the back and front of the
main scanning direction) adjustment original.
0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on, and
execute again.
6-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on, and
execute again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning direction Turn the power off and on, and execute
again.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direction
Adjust manually.
16 Magnification error in the main scanning (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and execute
again.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Scan the test chart image distribution directly from the scanner .
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
Important
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Set the test chart 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
4 Set the test chart 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
6 Set the test chart 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
1st retrial
1 [Retry] appears unless normally completed.
2 Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
1 [Retry] appears unless normally completed.
6-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Execute Step 3 to 7
An error code appears when an error occurs.
Error codes list
S003 Original position shift in the sub- E004 Uneven density error
scanning direction
Initial setting: On
Automatically set to on after completing correction.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjusting the leading edge timing, enter line and margins
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
* Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1 Set A3/Ledger paper.
Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
3 Select [Execute].
S002 Black band is not detected (main C104 Adjustment value error (center line)
scanning direction near end )
S003 Black band is not detected (auxiliary CFFF Other controller error
scanning direction leading edge)
6-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Description
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Execution
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: ChartA
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: White
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
6-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Black
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 10.6 -
Setting: Gray1
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 76.2 -
Setting: Gray2
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 25.2 -
Setting: Gray3
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 51.3 -
6-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: C
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 72.6 -
Setting: M
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 48.1 -
Setting: Y
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 86.2 -
Setting: R
1 Select the item to set.
6-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 46.7 -
Setting: G
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 67.8 -
Setting: B
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 38.8 -
Note
This setting is usually unnecessary.
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing 189.0 to 191.0 190.0 0.1mm
edge.
6-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
1 Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt 3 of
the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B:
105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2 Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys keys.
4 Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of black
belt 2.
5 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys keys.
7 Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on the
adjustment original at two positions.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the leading
edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and deduct A. E:
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at
180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8 Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys keys.
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
Setting: DP(ChartB)
Note
This setting is usually unnecessary.
6-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Main Scan Set the adjustment value of the left 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing 388.0 to 392.0 390.0 0.1mm
edge.
1 Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
2 Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the [+] [-] keys keys.
3 Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [+] [-] keys keys.
5 Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the
adjustment original.
6 Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the [+] [-] keys keys.
Lead
Sub Scan
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display/changes the density of each color in various image quality mode.
Purpose
Execute to change each color's balance.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Text+Photo
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is
decreased.
6-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Photo
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is
decreased.
Setting: Photo/Printout
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is
decreased.
Setting: Text
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is
decreased.
6-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Graphics/Map
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is
decreased.
6-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Copy/Printout
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value 0 to 10 5
When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is
decreased.
Note
Test copy of the original is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode when executing
this maintenance mode.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Correct the threshold of multi feed sensor in DP
• DP-7130 installed
Purpose
In case that multi feed happen frequently, adjust the threshold in conditions.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: DP
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Conveying Sensor Executing Calibration
6-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting:Threshold(Single)/(Multi)
1 Select the item to set.
2 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Threshold(Single) Setting paper conveying threshold 0 to 255 0
Method: Execute
1 Select [Execute].
Initial setting: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Executes each setting of the calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Time Interval Set the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Leaving Time Setting the time to determine whether to execute calibration when recovering
from Sleep mode
Target Value Setting the target sensor value for the toner thick layer calibration and light
intensity calibration
Setting: Permission
1 Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Initial setting: On
6-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Custom 0 to 9999
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Short 0: Executing the calibration: short
Initial setting: On
6-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: AP/NE
1 Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Initial setting: On
Setting: Timing
• Setting the mode to Custom, following changes are reflected.
1 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting
range
Time(sec) Setting continuous printing standard time 60 to 9999
Custom 60 to 9999
6-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Initial setting
1 In case that change thinning amount to improve darkness on trailing edge of image
when High model SolidImage is on. (Apply Cyan, Magenta, Yellow)
1 Change the value like follows (setting 1, setting 2)
Setting Initial Setting1 Setting2
Items Contents
range setting (+20) (+40)
Thickness(C) Toner layer calibration (Cyan) 0 to 1000 720 740 760
6-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 In case of High model SolidImage Off and On (BK), and make image density darker.
1 Change the value like follows (setting 1, setting 2)
Setting Initial Setting1 Setting2
Items Contents
range setting (+20) (+40)
Thickness(C) Toner layer calibration (Cyan) 0 to 1000 819 839 859
6-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Calib
1 Select [Execute].
Initial setting: On
6-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
6-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: T7 CTD
The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
C T7 control value (Cyan)
Method: Stress
The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Color registration correction operation setting
Also, Set the execution condition of the color registration correction by the LSU temperature variation.
Purpose
If the color registration is unstable due to the sensor failure, etc., set it to off to temporarily fix the control value.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Timing Execute the color registration correction if the LSU temperature changes by the
specified value after the previous correction
Initial setting: On
Setting: Timing
1 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
LSU Temp Execution condition by the LSU temperature 2 to 10 10
variation
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Reference: V Correction
The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Status Primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Sub Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the sub scanning direction.
Sub Scan Manual color registration adjustment in the sub scanning direction.
Magnification 1-6 Manual color registration correction value 1 for magnification 1-6
6-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the operation of the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Adjust in case of color shift in printing
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Important
Make sure to execute U464 Calib before executing this maintenance mode.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Auto
1 Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Print Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Method: Print
1 Press [Start] key.
Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Method: Execute
1 Place an original on the table and press [Start] key.
Execute the automatic adjustment.
6-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Manual
1 Select the item to execute.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Regist Set the color registration adjustment value
Method: Print
1 Press [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.
Chart sample
Print the chart that have H-1 to 7 for m, c and y (upper part) and V-1, 3, 5 (lower part).
Find the positions where two lines are best matched on each chart.
If it is in "1” to “A” then the correction is unnecessary.
In case of the illustration below, "B” (-2) is the value that should be set.
A to I are for -1 to 9.
6-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Regist
1 Select the item to set.
6-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Display: Result
1 Select [Result].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce the image
roughness by changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged copy . If the set value is
reduced, compression is high and image quality is lowered. If the set value is increased, image quality is
improved but processing speed is slower.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Copy
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Setting: Photo
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 10
Setting: Text
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
6-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Send
1 Select the item to set.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression priority).
Setting: Photo
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
Setting: Text
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
6-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: HC-PDF(BG)
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 15(%)
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 15(%)
6-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 15(%)
Setting: System
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)
Setting: Print
1 Select the item to set.
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 7(%)
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 7(%)
Note
Test copy is available by pressing [System Menu] key as interruption copy mode while this maintenance mode
is running.
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, Set the cleaning operation interval and
timing to enter the operation.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Execute
1 Press [Start] key.
The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Cnt Set the LSU cleaning cycle. 0 to 5000 1000
Setting: Cnt
1 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Settable in 500-sheet increments
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the PDF image rotation method. Also, changes/installs the color table.
Purpose
Execute to change the PDF image rotation method.
Execute to change the copy and printer color mode.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
2 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
settin Contents
g
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
Initial setting: 0
6-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Items Contents
Uninstall(Prn) Uninstalling the printer color table
TYPE_FJ
TYPE_I1*3
TYPE_HE
TYPE_K1
TYPE_KO
TYPE_KY*1
TYPE_RH
TYPE_ST*2
TYPE_TO
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
6-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
setting
CTYPE_A1*1
CTYPE_2Color(vivid)
CTYPE_CA
CTYPE_FJ
CTYPE_I1*3
CTYPE_KO
CTYPE_KY*2
CTYPE_RH
CTYPE_SH
CTYPE_TO
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Method: Install
Insert the USB drive with the color table files before selecting them.
Check if there is the color table file in the root folder of a USB drive.
1 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Color table installation
Method: Uninstall(Prn)/Uninstall(Copy)
1 Selects the color table to uninstall.
Simultaneous uninstallation of multiple items is available.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the operation mode after detecting color originals with color/BW mixed originals.
Purpose
Mode: To prioritize the productivity when copying color/BW mixed originals in ACS mode, change the setting to
Mode3. However, if setting it to Mode3, even when B/W originals come after color originals, C/M/Y developer
maintenance counts are counted up.
Permission: set in case of color background image when printing an envelope in BW half speed mode processed
as color printing.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Mode
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Mode1 For users mostly printing in B/W mode and color/B/W mixed mode is not high
during continuous printing.
B/W printing remains in the color process speed after switching to color and
other process is switched .
Mode2 For users mostly printing in B/W mode and color/B/W mixed mode is not high
during continuous printing.
Even when receiving a B/W print request during color printing, color printing
operation is continued until 9 pages and color mode is switched to B/W mode
when starting printing of the 10th page (Color process is stopped).
6-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Permission
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the remote service
Purpose
Set remote service function
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the
destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file
system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
3 Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the OEM code
4 Select [Execute].
6-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
*1: Sales company for Singapore, India, Thailand and Hong Kong.
*2: Sales company for USA, Mexico and Canada.
*3: Sales company for Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentine and Brazil.
*: Sales company for Italy, Germany, Spain, UK, Holland, Sweden, France, Australia, Switzerland, Belgium,
Denmark, Finland, Portugal, Ireland, Norway, Turkey, Russia, and Saudi Arabia.
*5: In case of handling in New Zealand, the country code has to be set at sales company. The code is 126 for
this handling.
6-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM
setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
3 Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Set the OEM code
4 Select [Execute].
6-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Rings(F/T)].
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
Completion
6-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the
auto reduction mode.
Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease the
value if there is dropout in received image.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge
margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
6-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge
margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U611 System 2
(Message: System Setting 2)
Contents
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Set the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is
set.
6-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U612 System 3
(Message: System Setting 3)
Contents
Set the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Initial setting: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U615 System 6
(Message: System Setting 6)
Contents
Set the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification machine
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete
transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Interval
1 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variatio
n
Set the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 -
minutes
Setting: Times
1 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variatio
n
Set the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the following to correspond to field claims
• Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line
• Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
TX Echo Set the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
Setting: TX Speed
Set the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for
transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the communication speed.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
6-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: RX Speed
Set the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has the V.34
capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the reception speed.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
Setting: TX Echo
Set the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo at
the transmitter side.
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
Setting: RX Echo
Set the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error occurs
with echo at the receiver side.
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Initial setting: 75
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Set the transmission and reception of ECM
Set the CED frequency
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Note
Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Initial setting: On
1 Press [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completed is displayed.
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Note
Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Initial setting: On
6-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
1100 1100Hz
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Set the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone switching
mode.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
RTN Check Set the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Set whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception.
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
Initial setting: On
Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Set if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Initial setting: On
6-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as one of
measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
Relax the communication conditions
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
TCF Check Set the allowed error bytes when detecting the 1 to 255 0
TCF signal
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Set the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Set the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Time(One) Set the one-shot detection time for remote 0 to 255 7
switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
6-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
send start
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
6-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Set the G3 cable equalizer. Set the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Set the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Sgl LVL Modem Set the modem output level -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV (Cent) DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
-9 (100V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6 (120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Set the DTMF output level (level 0 to 5.5 2
difference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
Initial setting: On
6-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Important
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Setting: DC Loop
Set if the loop current is detected before dialing.
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.
Initial setting: On
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is pressed to
halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance mode
(self-status report).
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Clears the FAX/i-FAX communication history and scheduled FAX transmission backup data in the FAX PWB.
Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-334
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1 Select the item to set.
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
DetectionTime Setting detection time of FAX print job suspend error (C0950).
Initial setting: On
6-335
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-336
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Set the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Set only when different items are set for each
port.
Note
This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
1 Press [Start] key.
Important
These contents to set are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning the power
off and the settings are necessary when entering the maintenance mode.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-337
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
Note
Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
3 Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press [Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-338
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
0 2400bps/V34
Modem setting
No. Bit Contents
89 76543 RX gain adjust
6-339
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
NCU setting
No. Bit Contents
121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection chart
126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC
circuit
6-340
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display and clears the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance
parts.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Display/clears the MP tray feed counter
2 Select [Execute].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-341
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display/clears the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-342
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display/clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-343
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher and inner
finisher.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: DP
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
Method: DF
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Carry in Display the sorter counter.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-344
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after repairing the parts.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-345
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the total counter.
Purpose
Display the total counter for check.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the total count.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-346
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Clear the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on the
service status page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-347
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the paper feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Display the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Display A3 feed counts
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-348
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Retrieve the backup data to a USB drive from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB drive to the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method
1 Turn the power switch off.
Fax Forward *2 FAX forward information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Panel Setting Panel setting information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX setting
and Program
6-349
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB drive.
9 When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 seconds
between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e0001 Error in processing communication.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-350
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-351
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-352
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Display the machine life count
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-353
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Display and clears the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
The main charge roller counter for each color is displayed.
Items Contents
C The current main charger roller count for C is displayed.
Method: Clear
1 Select the item to set.
2 Select [Clear].
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-354
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Set the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each maintenance item
individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Export
1 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export the maintenance log to a USB drive.
6-355
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Setting: Setting
1 Select the item to set.
Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
U000-U019 Set the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-356
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Note
Pressing [System Menu/Counter] allows you to adjust setting on the screen showed below.
(Feed cassette/Conveying speed/Duplex printing/Color BW setting/Print Set/Output tray)
3 Place an original on the DP and press [Start] key to make a test copy.
6 Change the setting value by using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys.
Items Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Front Single-side original loop amount -32 to 32 0 0.20mm (DP-7100)
0.16mm (DP-7110/
DP-7130)
0.06mm (DP-7120)
Back *1 Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-357
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Contents
Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the main unit or the USB drive.
Purpose
Execute to register regular maintenance items.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Method: Continue
1 Select maintenance item number to execute.
Method: Execute(USB)
1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
5 Select [Execute(USB)].
6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB drive
6-358
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
Method: Execute
1 Select the place to save the data to execute.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
Low-end model
Items Contents
SET UP 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278
High-end Model
Items Contents
SET UP 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278
MK-A 119, 930, 140, 469, 127, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
MK-B 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 412, 464, 410, 251
Method: Entry(USB)
1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
5 Select [Entry(USB)].
6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB drive
6-359
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
8 Select [Execute].
Registers the workflow in a USB drive to the main unit.
Method: Entry
1 Select [Entry].
3 By using [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-360
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Transfer the log files saved in the HDD to a USB drive.
The data contains log and screen shot at retrieving log.
Purpose
In order to investigate a failure, retrieve the log file saved in the HDD to a USB drive.
Method
1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
5 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.
8 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
An error code appears when there is an error.
Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB drive is not installed
No File No file
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB drive
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-361
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB drive.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB drive to check it.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB drive.
Items Contents
1 USB drive is broken. USB drive was disconnected during data processing or is
write-protected.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-362
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Display the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Display the developer unit number.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit number.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-363
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Display the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Display the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Select color to refer to.
Items Contents
C Display the Cyan developer unit history.
Display the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-364
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
Execute recovery of HDD management data error by turning the power off while accessing to the HDD.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-365
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Display the accumulated CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the CIS usage.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Display the accumulated CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-366
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode >
Contents
Display the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method
1 Press [Start] key.
Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Display times of copy and scan operations.
Completion
1 Press [Stop] key.
Return to the screen for selecting maintenance number.
6-367
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7Troubleshooting
7 - 1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
How to isolate the cause
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
1 Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page P.7-2, P.7-18 or P.7-30).
(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass→CCD failure at scanning factor)
2 Refer to image failure with engine factor (See page P.7-45 or P.7-18).
(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Tansfer image formation process failure)
Sending :
7-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through DP, or scanning the back side through
the mechanically reversed DP)
No. Contents Image sample
(2-1) Abnormal image (7-4page)
7-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
2 Checking the connection The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD connection cable. Or, Detaching
connected, or is faulty. replace it. and
reattaching
the HDD
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and
reattaching
the HDD
4 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
10 Checking the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
11 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty or not Clean the DP slit glass or reattach it.
properly attached.
12 Adjusting the left DP hinge The original is raised at Adjust the left DP hinge height.
height scanning.
13 DP replacement The DP frame is deformed or Replace the document processor. Detaching
the DP hinges are faulty. and
reattaching
the DP
14 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
15 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
16 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
17 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the Manual -
the wire, FFC, the PWB is wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the Section 8
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace "PWBs"
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Front side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)
(2-6) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Back side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
7-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
6 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
17 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
18 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Front side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)
7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(2-10) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Back side)
(When scanning the back side through the mechanically reversed DP)
7 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
9 Cleaning the DP slit glass and The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and the DP original
the DP original conveying conveying guide.
guide
7-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
6 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt comes Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt off.
7 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is not Reattach the scanner drive gear.
gear properly attached.
8 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
8 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
9 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the Manual -
the wire, FFC, the PWB is wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the Section 8
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace "PWBs"
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
8 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
12 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
14 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the Service
not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the Manual -
the wire, FFC, the PWB is wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the Section 8
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace "PWBs"
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(3) Scanner Factors (Dual scan DP:When scanning the back side through DP)
No. Contents Image sample
(3-1) Abnormal image (7-20page)
7-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(3-4) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
7-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(3-7) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
7-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(3-9) Moiré
7-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
2 Checking the cable The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD cable, or replace it.
connected, or is faulty.
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and
reattaching
the HDD
4 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
6 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
10 Checking the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
11 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
12 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lamp
Unit
13 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
14 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
15 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
4 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
6 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(4-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
6 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
8 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
12 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
14 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(4-8) Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image
7 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(4-10) Moiré
3 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
5 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
15 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
16 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
17 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
10 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
11 Checking the original size Original size and paper size Replace the original size sensor.
sensor are not matched on the
operation panel display.
(Original size sensor is
misdetected.)
12 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
14 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. reconnect all the connectors to the main Detaching
PWB. If the wire is pinched up or has and
damage, repair or replace it. If not repaired, reattaching
replace the main PWB. the Main
PWB
7-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
9 Checking the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit. Detaching
properly. and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
10 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
11 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(5) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
No. Contents Image sample
(5-1) Colored background (7-47page)
7-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(5-1) Colored background
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch Detaching
unit dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of and
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. After reattaching
cleaning, in case if it is not improved even the Primary
performing the calibration and color Transfer
adjustment, replace the primary transfer unit. Unit
Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
7-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(5-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides width guides do not fit with the size.
paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when image Adjust the center line at U034 [LSU Out Left]. Maintenanc
writing the data is incorrect. e Mode List
7-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(5-11) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image (variation of
paper leading edge timing)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is not Adjust the leading edge timing at U034 [LSU Maintenanc
properly adjusted. Out Top]. e Mode List
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount before Execute U051 to adjust the paper loop Maintenanc
registration is improper. amount before registration. e Mode List
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying related Execute U032. If the paper feed / conveying Maintenanc
clutch does not operate related clutches (feed clutch, middle clutch e Mode List
correctly. or registration clutch) do not operate Detaching
properly, reattach them and reconnect the and
connectors. If not repaired, replace the feed reattaching
drive unit. the Feed
Drive Unit
(5-13) Offset
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the Cassette /
specification, or change to the media type MP Tray
setting closest to the specified paper. Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Change the settings according to the media Cassette /
set. type (paper weight). MP Tray
Settings
(Operation
Guide -
Section 8)
7-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
13 Replacing the lens unit The full color cannot be Replace the lens unit. Detaching
reproduced since the CCD and
PWB is faulty. (Red images reattaching
are output.) the Lens
Unit
14 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
3 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
4 Replacing the developer unit The developer drive gear is Replace the developer unit. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
5 Executing U140 The setting value of the Execute U140 and reset the developer bias Maintenanc
developer bias is improper. to the default value. e Mode List
6 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly. The connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
foreign objects adhere on the there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
connector terminal which • Developer motor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
makes contact failure. Or, the
• Developer clutch K - Feed image PWB
wire is faulty.
• Feed image PWB - Engine PWB
7 Checking the developer motor The developing motor does Execute U030 to check the developer motor Maintenanc
not operate properly. operation. If the developer motor does not e Mode List
operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
8 Checking the developer clutch The developing clutch K does Execute U032 and check the developer Maintenanc
K (25/32ppm models) not operate properly. clutch operation. If it does not operate e Mode List
correctly, reattach the developer clutch and
reconnect the connector.
7-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
19 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
20 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
7-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
10 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
11 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
7-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(6-15) Offset
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Specifying the abnormal color (Specify the abnormal color) Output the Color Belt at U089 and specify Maintenanc
the failure color. e Mode List
2 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust/
Maintenanc
e Menu
(Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
3 Setting the drum heater Developing section is affected Set [ON] at U339 [Drum Heater]. Maintenanc
by the humidity e Mode List
4 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit. Detaching
down or has some scratches. and
reattaching
the Drum
Unit
5 Cleaning the developing roller The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
6 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller surface is Replace the developer unit. Detaching
worn down or has scratches. and
reattaching
the
Developer
Unit
7-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
(6-18) Light vertical black streaks at both edge of paper which is outside of the image area
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Developer Refresh Toner outside the developing As a relief measure, execute Developer Adjust/
area width (311mm) of the Refresh. Maintenanc
developing roller flies and is e Menu
transferred to the drum side. (Operation
As a result, light vertical black Guide -
streaks appears on both ends Section 10)
(out of the image area) of the
SRA3 paper which is wider
than the developing area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the developing Explain to the user that it is a vertical black
area width (311mm) of the streak which is outside the image area and
developing roller flies and is can not be completely eliminated. (It will not
transferred to the drum side. be completely eliminated by exchanging the
As a result, light vertical black developing unit, etc.).
streaks appears on both ends 'SRA 3 (450 x 320 mm) is the paper width
(out of the image area) of the that can be printed in the margin' Line for
SRA3 paper which is wider marking design work and marking for cutting
than the developing area (registration mark) '.The location where this
width. vertical black streak occurs is outside the
[registration mark] and it is not an image
area. therefore, there is no problem in actual
use.'
7-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1) Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam due to the conveying rollers or pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
7-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper storage Papers have been stored in Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
place the improper place.
2 Installing the cassette heater The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater and set the mode Installing the
by executing U327. optional
equipment
(Cassette
Heater)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
7-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Paper jam.
1. Open main unit right cover 1.
2. Open cover (A3) and
remove the paper.
3. Close the main unit right cover.
4. Open cassette 1.
JAM
5. Remove the paper. L
To remove paper which is difficult
JAM to get access to, the cassette
1
can be removed.
6. Close the cassette.
1/12 4
2 1/12
3
e011001
K
M
Q
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
7-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
19
20
M 22
31 21
K
27
Q 23 11
13 J
N U
26 N N 12 10 9
25 L 8
P 24
W H
N 3
7
4
V
29
6 G
1
18 F
A T 5
2
R 28 H
S B 16
30
17
I
E 15 C 14
7-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
18
19
32 20 M 21
N 11
N 22 13
J
12 U
P 24 23 L 10 9
N 8
L
W H
H
3
7
4
VV
6V G
G
G
1
T
A
A
A 5
2 HH
B
B
B
16
III
C
C
C 14
17
D 15
7-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
J7210 R
J7300 R
J7310 S
J7400 R
7-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Remarks: Items to be checked beforehand when the cassette no paper feed jam occurs
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on after passing
the specific time.
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette).
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on the
leading edge of paper)
7-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate does not
rise up (Can't hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette).
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on
the leading edge of paper)
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on the
leading edge of paper)
7-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no paper feeding mark at the leading edge of paper, and the lift plate rise up
(Can hear the descent sound of the lift plate when pulling out the cassette), but feed drive does not
start.
When feeding from the cassette3, 4, the leading edge of paper does not come out. (There is no paper feeding mark on
the leading edge of paper)
7-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Feed slip mark on paper leading edge. (Pick up pulley can't convey paper)
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the pickup roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor does not
turn on.
7-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a bent or tear on the center of paper leading edge (Can't feed till retard roller. Or,
the retard roller does not roll forward.)
When feeding from cassette 1 to 4, paper stops at the retard roller after feed clutch turns on, and next sensor does not
turn on.
Condition: There is a bent other than the center of paper leading edge (The paper jam occurs as
paper is caught before paper goes into the retard roller.)
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on since the
paper stops at the paper feed roller.
7-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette 1, 2, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette but
stops at next roller.
7-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Paper conveying capability is decreasing or paper is slipping. Or, the roller is not rotating.
When feeding from cassette3, 4, after feed clutch turns on, the leading edge of paper comes out from the cassette but
stops at next roller.
7-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).
7-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Duplex conveying drive does not rotate. Or, DU clutch
does not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on after DU clutch is ON (dual reverse operation).
7-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
The MP conveying sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.
7-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor does
not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.
7-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, PF feed clutch does not
operate correctly.)
When feeding from large capacity feeder, the PF horizontal conveying sensor or the PF vertical conveying sensor does
not turn on even predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch is turned on.
7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
The PF feed sensor does not turn on even after the predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch turns on
when feeding from side feeder.
7-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, the conveying clutch does
not operate correctly.)
The PF feed sensor does not turn on even after the predetermined time has passed since the PF feed clutch turns on
when feeding from side feeder.
7-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.
7-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does not
operate correctly.)
The conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 3 or 4.
7-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.
7-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is a damage on paper. (Paper is caught. Conveying capability is decreasing. Or,
paper is slipping.)
The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.
7-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does not
operate correctly.)
PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feed paper from the cassette 4.
7-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (Feed drive does not start. Or, conveying clutch does not
operate correctly.)
The PF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 4.
7-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side feeder
7-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: There is no damage on paper. (The middle roller does not rotate. The middle clutch does
not operate correctly.)
The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.
Object: Main unit (Cassette 2), Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder (Cassette3, 4), or Side feeder
The registration sensor does not turn off when feeding paper from the cassette 2 to 4 or the side feeder.
7-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Paper JAM on the primary transfer belt. (Paper does not separate from the belt)
The belt roll-up sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, the side feeder, duplex section or the
MP tray.
7-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper wraps around the fuser roller when feeding paper from cassette 1 to
4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.
7-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The fuser sensor does not turn on since the paper wraps around the fuser roller when feeding paper from cassette 1 to
4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray.
Condition: Paper jam after passing through the fuser exit roller.
Although the paper jam occurs after passing through the fuser exit roller when feeding paper from cassette 1 to 4, side
feeder, duplex section or the MP tray, the fuser sensor does not turn on.
7-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: Paper jam at the exit section when feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the
punch unit installed for the inner finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section or
the MP tray, the corners of the paper leading edge are caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit and
paper jam occurs, and the fuser sensor does not turn on.
7-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
3 Checking the DF paper entry The DF entry sensor does not Execute U241 [Finisher] > [HP]. If the DF Maintenanc
sensor operate correctly. entry sensor does not operate properly, e Mode List
clean and reattach it, then reconnect the
connector. If not repaired, replace it.
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: J6100 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6101 (1000-sheet finisher), J6102
(Inner finisher)
• J6100/6101: Turning on the entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after receiving the
main unit eject command
• J6102: Turning on the entry sensor or punch entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after
receiving the main unit eject command
Object: J6100 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6101 (1000-sheet finisher), J6102 (Inner finisher)
7-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: J6110 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6111 (1000-sheet finisher), J6112
(Inner finisher)
• J6110/J6111: Turning off the entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the
entry switch.
• J6112: Turning off the entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the entry
sensor, or turning off the punch entry sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the
punch entry sensor
J6200: Sub tray eject non-arrival jam/ Entry timing sensor non-arrival jam
7-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
J6300/J6301: Finishing tray non-arrival jam/ Sub tray eject sensor non-arrival jam
7-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
J6310/J6311: Finishing tray stay jam/ Sub tray eject sensor stay jam
Object: J6310 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6311 (1000-sheet finisher)
Turning off the middle sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning on the middle sensor
(4000-sheet finisher/1000-sheet finisher)/turning off the sub tray eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the
specified time after turning off the entry timing sensor (100-sheet staple finisher).
Object: J6400 (4000-sheet finisher), J6401 (1000-sheet finisher), J6402 (Inner finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF middle sensor turned on.
7-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: J6410 (4000-sheet finisher), J6411 (1000-sheet finisher), J6412 (Inner finisher)
The DF exit sensor does not turn on even specific time has passed after DF exit sensor turned on.
7-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
5 Checking the DF drum timing The DF drum timing sensor Execute U241[Finisher] > [Drum Timing]
sensor does not operate properly. If the DF drum timing sensor does not
operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
the connector.
Replace it if not repaired.
6 Checking the DF retraction The DF retraction drum motor Execute U240[Motor] > [Save] Maintenanc
drum motor does not operate properly. If the DF relief drum motor does not operate e Mode List
correctly, reattach it and reconnect the
connector.
Replace it if not repaired.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DP firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version. Update
8 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: J6510 (4000-sheet finisher/100-sheet staple finisher), J6511 (1000-sheet finisher), J6512
(Inner finisher)
Turning off the eject paper sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after starting the bundle eject/
turning off the eject sensor cannot be detected when passing the specified time after turning off the middle switch
(straight eject only).
7-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
7-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: J6910 (4000-sheet finisher), J6911 (1000-sheet finisher), J6912 (Inner finisher)
DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor 2 turned
on during the standby operation.
7-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: J7000 (4000-sheet finisher), J7001 (1000-sheet finisher), J7002 (Inner finisher)
The DF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the DF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up was
detected during the DF staple motor operation.
7-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
1. DP timing sensor turned off immediately after DP timing sensor turns ON.
2. When secondary feed starts, DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF.
3. When DP timing sensor is ON, DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor is OFF.
4. When DP registration sensor is OFF, the original at secondary feed section does not reach to DP timing sensor.
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
Remarks: When detecting the DP feedshift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times), J9002 is displayed.
(Reversing dual scan DP only)
The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying.
7-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP (feed belt type)
The DP lift upper limit sensor does not turn on even the specific pulse has passed when the DP lift plate rise up.
7-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
11 Checking the DP lift upper limit The DP lift upper limit sensor Execute U244 [Lift U-Limit]. If the DP lift Maintenanc
sensor does not operate correctly. upper limit sensor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
12 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP (feed belt type)
The next original is in standby of the secondary paper feed during the image scanning.
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the DP opening/ Maintenanc
closing sensor sensor does not operate closing sensor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
properly. reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
4 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
3 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover sensor does Execute U244 [Cover Open]. If the DP top Maintenanc
sensor not operate correctly. cover sensor does not operate correctly, e Mode List
reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
4 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
The DP feed sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.
7-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
11 Checking the connection for The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
the mechanically reversed DP connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
with the DP feed roller wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• DP feed clutch - DP PWB 'PWBs'
12 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor is dirty, is Clean and reattach the DP feed sensor, then
not properly attached, is not reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
properly connected, or it is replace it.
faulty.
13 Checking the DP feed clutch The rotation of the DP feed Execute U243 [Feed Clutch]. If the DP feed Maintenanc
for the mechanically reversed roller does not stop while the clutch does not operate correctly, reattach it e Mode List
DP with the DP feed roller DP feed clutch remains and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
engaged. replace it.
14 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
The DP timing sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP registration
sensor turned on.
7-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP
The DP timing sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP registration
sensor turned off.
7-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP (feed belt type)
The DP exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.
7-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Object: Double feed detection DP, dual scan DP and reversing dual scan DP (feed belt type)
The DP exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP timing sensor turned off.
7-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
Condition: The image is not printed on the crease section. (Registration, transfer factor)
7-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
(4-3) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch unit for the
inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being caught by the PH cutter
receiving holes
Condition: When feeding LetterR or Legal on the machine with the punch unit installed for the inner
finisher. (Inch specification only)
When feeding LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4 (except the large capacity feeder), duplex section or the
MP tray, the corners of paper leading edge is caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit and the dog-ear
occurs
7-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
(4-4) Dog-ear
7-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 - 3 Self Diagnostic
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Caution
Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power
switch off and unplug the machine from power.
Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric charge may
remain in the capacitors on the low voltage PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the mounted parts to
protect you from electric shock.
7-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-224
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-225
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-226
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-227
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-228
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-229
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-230
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-231
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial command was
transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.
7-232
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.
4 Replacing the feed drive PWB The feed drive PWB is faulty. Replace the feed drive PWB.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.
4 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-233
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
5 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Format). Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
6 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and
reattaching
the HDD
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-234
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Format). Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
5 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and
reattaching
the HDD
6 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
3 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD Format). Maintenanc
faulty. e Mode List
4 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. Detaching
and
reattaching
the HDD
5 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-235
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-236
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-237
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-238
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. When the +24V generation from the low Detaching
PWB voltage PWB is not stable, and it lowers, and
replace the low voltage PWB. reattaching
the Low
Voltage
PWB
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-239
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-240
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-241
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
6 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 is Reattach PF lift upper limit sensor 1. Then,
not properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
7-242
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
6 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 is Reattach PF lift upper limit sensor 2. Then,
not properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
7-243
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Checking the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. Replace the PF lift motor.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• PF lift upper limit sensor - PF PWB 'PWBs'
6 Checking the PF lift upper limit The PF lift upper limit sensor Reattach the PF lift upper limit sensor. Then,
sensor is not properly attached, or it is replace it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
7 Checking the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
4 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-244
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-245
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-246
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-247
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Remarks: Developing motor CMY: 32/25ppm models, Developing motor M: 35ppm or faster models
1. After the developer motor CMY drive or the developer motor M drive start, the ready signal does not reach to L level
even passing 2s.
2. After the developer motor CMY or the developer motor M stabilize, the ready signal shows H level for 2s continu-
ously.
7-248
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-249
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-250
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-251
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-252
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-253
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-254
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-255
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Home position sensor - Engine PWB 'PWBs'
9 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Replace the home position sensor.
sensor faulty.
10 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
11 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-256
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-257
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-258
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and execute U411. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Lens
Unit
Maintenanc
e Mode List
3 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-259
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon Detaching
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it and
does not rotate properly. reattaching
the LSU
3 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon Detaching
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it and
does not rotate properly. reattaching
the LSU
3 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU while paying Detaching
diode is faulty. attention to the static electricity. and
reattaching
the LSU
3 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
7-260
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU while paying Detaching
diode is faulty. attention to the static electricity. and
reattaching
the LSU
3 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version Update
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-261
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-262
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
7 Replacing the main high The main high voltage PWB is Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB faulty. and
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
7-263
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 Replacing the main high The main high voltage PWB is Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB faulty. and
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-264
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 Replacing the main high The main high voltage PWB is Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB faulty. and
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-265
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 Replacing the main high The main high voltage PWB is Replace the main high voltage PWB. Detaching
voltage PWB faulty. and
reattaching
the Main
High Voltage
PWB
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-266
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-267
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-268
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-269
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-270
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-271
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-272
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-273
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-274
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
10 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
11 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• IH unit - IH PWB 'PWBs'
7-275
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-276
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-277
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-278
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-279
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
9 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
10 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• IH unit - IH PWB 'PWBs'
7-280
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-281
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-282
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-283
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-284
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
5 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
4 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the IH PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-285
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-286
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-287
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-288
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-289
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Checking the toner container The toner container motor is Reattach the container motor and reconnect Detaching
motor faulty. the connector. If not repaired, replace it. and
reattaching
the
Container
Motor
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
6 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
7-290
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-291
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-292
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-293
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-294
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-295
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the LSU
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) is Replace the LSU. Detaching
faulty. and
reattaching
the LSU
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-296
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-297
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the toner supply Toner supply drive unit (toner Replace the toner supply drive unit. Detaching
drive unit motor K or toner remaining and
sensor K) is faulty. reattaching
the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
5 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
3 Replacing the toner supply The toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply drive unit. Detaching
drive unit (toner motor C or toner and
remaining amount sensor C) is reattaching
faulty. the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
5 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
7-298
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the toner supply The toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply drive unit. Detaching
drive unit (toner motor M or toner level and
sensor M) is faulty. reattaching
the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
5 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
3 Replacing the toner supply The toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply drive unit. Detaching
drive unit (toner motor Y or toner level and
sensor Y) is faulty. reattaching
the Toner
Supply Drive
Unit
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
5 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
7-299
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-300
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-301
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Update
5 Replacing the transfer The transfer connection PWB Replace the transfer connection PWB.
connection PWB is faulty.
6 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
7-302
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Checking the power source The fan motor does not rotate Clean the power source fan motor and check Fan Motors
fan motor properly since it is dirty. if the fan is rotated manually. Then, reattach Attachable
it. Direction
3 Replacing the power source The power source fan motor is Replace the power source fan motor if it Fan Motors
fan motor faulty. does not operate properly when executing Attachable
U037 [LVU]. Direction
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-303
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-304
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-305
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 (In case if the printout is light) The developer roller does not If the developer roller does not contact the
Checking the connecting gear contact the drum since it does drum even if closing the front cover for the
of the front cover for the not properly interlock with the maintenance, reattach the gear connecting
maintenance (25/32PPM opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
models) of the front cover for the
maintenance.
4 (In case if the printout is light) The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not repaired, replace it. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing the LSU. properly from the LSU. Or, and
LSU dustproof glass is dirty. reattaching
the LSU
5 (In case if the printout is light) Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. And next, set [On] Adjust/
Improving the condensation of surface at U339 [Drum heater] to turn on the drum Maintenanc
the drum surface (35ppm or heater. e Menu
faster models) (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
6 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front and rear ID
sensors.
7 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
8 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the ID sensor Maintenanc
shutter not operate properly. shutter does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
the cleaning solenoid.
9 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer belt Clean the surface of the primary transfer Detaching
unit surface is dirty. belt, or replace the primary transfer unit. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
10 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not properly Reattach the front and rear ID sensors and
attached, or the connector is reconnect the connectors.
not properly connected.
11 (When the image is too light) Proper current does not flow Reattach the main high voltage PWB and the
Checking the main high as the main high voltage PWB transfer high voltage PWB.
voltage PWB / transfer high or the contact point of the
voltage PWB transfer high voltage PWB is
faulty.
12 (When the image is too light) The parts for the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the Maintenanc
Checking the drum unit / developer unit and LSU is dirty drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or, e parts
developer unit / LSU or worn out. replace them. replacement
procedures
13 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
version. Update
14 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Front ID sensor and Rear ID sensor - Feed 'PWBs'
drive PWB
• Feed drive PWB - Engine PWB
15 Replacing the feed drive PWB The feed drive PWB is faulty. Replace the feed drive PWB.
7-306
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 (In case if the printout is light) The developer roller does not If the developer roller does not contact the
Checking the connecting gear contact the drum since it does drum even if closing the front cover for the
of the front cover for the not properly interlock with the maintenance, reattach the gear connecting
maintenance (25/32PPM opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
models) of the front cover for the
maintenance.
4 (In case if the printout is light) The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not repaired, replace it. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing the LSU. properly from the LSU. Or, and
LSU dustproof glass is dirty. reattaching
the LSU
5 (In case if the printout is light) Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. And next, set [On] Adjust/
Improving the condensation of surface at U339 [Drum heater] to turn on the drum Maintenanc
the drum surface (35ppm or heater. e Menu
faster models) (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
6 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front and rear ID
sensors.
7 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
8 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the ID sensor Maintenanc
shutter not operate properly. shutter does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
the cleaning solenoid.
9 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer belt Clean the surface of the primary transfer Detaching
unit surface is dirty. belt, or replace the primary transfer unit. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
10 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not properly Reattach the front and rear ID sensors and
attached, or the connector is reconnect the connectors.
not properly connected.
7-307
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-308
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 (In case if the printout is light) The developer roller does not If the developer roller does not contact the
Checking the connecting gear contact the drum since it does drum even if closing the front cover for the
of the front cover for the not properly interlock with the maintenance, reattach the gear connecting
maintenance (25/32ppm opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
models) of the front cover for the
maintenance.
4 (In case if the printout is light) The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not repaired, replace it. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing the LSU. properly from the LSU. Or, and
LSU dustproof glass is dirty. reattaching
the LSU
5 (In case if the printout is light) Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. And next, set [On] Adjust/
Improving the condensation of surface at U339 [Drum heater] to turn on the drum Maintenanc
the drum surface (35ppm or heater. e Menu
faster models) (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
6 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front and rear ID
sensors.
7 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
8 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the ID sensor Maintenanc
shutter not operate properly. shutter does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
the cleaning solenoid.
9 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer belt Clean the surface of the primary transfer Detaching
unit surface is dirty. belt, or replace the primary transfer unit. and
reattaching
the Primary
Transfer
Unit
10 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not properly Reattach the front and rear ID sensors and
attached, or the connector is reconnect the connectors.
not properly connected.
11 (When the image is too light) Proper current does not flow Reattach the main high voltage PWB and the
Checking the main high as the main high voltage PWB transfer high voltage PWB.
voltage PWB / transfer high or the contact point of the
voltage PWB transfer high voltage PWB is
faulty.
12 (When the image is too light) The parts for the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the Maintenanc
Checking the drum unit / developer unit and LSU is dirty drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or, e parts
developer unit / LSU or worn out. replace them. replacement
procedures
13 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Firmware
version. Update
7-309
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 (In case if the printout is light) The developer roller does not If the developer roller does not contact the
Checking the connecting gear contact the drum since it does drum even if closing the front cover for the
of the front cover for the not properly interlock with the maintenance, reattach the gear connecting
maintenance (25/32PPM opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
models) of the front cover for the
maintenance.
4 (In case if the printout is light) The laser does not output Clean the LSU. If not repaired, replace it. Detaching
Cleaning / replacing the LSU. properly from the LSU. Or, and
LSU dustproof glass is dirty. reattaching
the LSU
5 (In case if the printout is light) Condensation on the drum Execute the drum refresh. And next, set [On] Adjust/
Improving the condensation of surface at U339 [Drum heater] to turn on the drum Maintenanc
the drum surface (35ppm or heater. e Menu
faster models) (Operation
Guide -
Section 10)
Maintenanc
e Mode List
6 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the surface of the front and rear ID
sensors.
7 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. Maintenanc
e Mode List
8 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Execute U033 [ID Sensor]. If the ID sensor Maintenanc
shutter not operate properly. shutter does not operate properly, reattach e Mode List
the cleaning solenoid.
7-310
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 (In case if the printout is light) The developer roller does not If the developer roller does not contact the
Checking the connecting gear contact the drum since it does drum even if closing the front cover for the
of the front cover for the not properly interlock with the maintenance, reattach the gear connecting
maintenance (25/32PPM opening and closing operation to the front cover for the maintenance.
models) of the front cover for the
maintenance.
7-311
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-312
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-313
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
6 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB. Detaching
relay PWB PWB is faulty. and
reattaching
the Drum/
Developer
relay PWB
(Section 4
'Detaching
and
reattaching
the waste
toner box
unit')
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
8 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-314
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-315
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-316
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-317
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-318
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-319
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Remarks: In the color 35ppm or faster models, this error appears when the access to C/Y fails.
Data read in 2 places does not match 8 consecutive times. Writing data and reading data does not match 8 consecutive
times.
7-320
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the LSU The APC PWB (LSU) is faulty. Replace the LSU. Detaching
and
reattaching
the LSU
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
7-321
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-322
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
9 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
10 Replacing the feed drive PWB The feed drive PWB is faulty. Replace the feed drive PWB.
7-323
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher (When punch unit is installed)
1. The PH home position sensor does not turn on even 200ms passed when the PH motor drives.
2. The pulse plate does not count the specified pulse even 300ms passed after the punch operation was started.
3. After correction operation starts, the punch unit does not stop at 2-pulse position from the PH home position sensor
turning on within 500ms. (If the PH home position sensor turns on, the processing finishes normally.)
7-324
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Object: 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher, Inner finisher (When punch unit is installed)
The home position detection does not turn off within 50ms when initializing the home position.
7-325
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminals of the wire connector
connected. and reinstall it.
Or the wire is faulty. If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
・Punch shift motor - PH PWB
・Punch HP sensor - PH PWB
・PH PWB- DF PWB
4 Replacing the punch shift The punch shift motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Punch Move]
motor Replace the punch shift motor if it does not
operate properly
5 Checking the punch HP Punch HP sensor is not Execute U241 [Punch] > [Punch HP]
sensor properly attached or faulty. Reattach the punch HP sensor if it does not
operate properly.
Replace the punch HP sensor if not repaired.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the PH firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing PH PWB PH PWB is faulty. Replace PH PWB.
8 Replacing DF PWB DF PWB is faulty. Replace DF PWB.
After replacing the PWB, upgrade the
firmware to the latest version.
7-326
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-327
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-328
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-329
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-330
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Replacing the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray Maintenanc
motor does not operate properly, replace it. e Mode List
5 (When installing the 1000- The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
sheet finisher) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
connection wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• DF tray sensor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
6 (When installing the 4000- The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
sheet finisher) Checking the connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
connection wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• DF tray sensor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF tray sensor 2 - DF PWB
7 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• DF tray upper surface sensor 1 - DF PWB 'PWBs'
• DF tray upper surface sensor 2 - DF PWB
8 (When installing the 1000- DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1, then execute Maintenanc
sheet finisher) Checking DF properly attached, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Tray U-Limit]. If DF tray e Mode List
tray sensor 1 faulty. sensor 1 does not operate properly, replace
it.
9 (When installing the 4000- DF tray sensors 1, 2 are not Reattach DF tray sensor 1 or 2, then execute Maintenanc
sheet finisher) Checking DF properly attached, or they are U241 [Finisher] > [Tray U-Limit] or [Tray e Mode List
tray sensor 1, 2 faulty. HP2]. If DF tray sensor 1 or 2 does not
operate properly, replace it.
10 Checking DF tray upper side DF tray upper surface sensors Reattach DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or Maintenanc
sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly attached, 2, then execute U241 [Finisher] > [Tray Top]. e Mode List
or they are faulty. If DF tray upper surface sensor 1 or 2 does
not operate properly, replace it.
11 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Upgrade the firmware Detaching
by using the latest upgrade pack immediately and
after replacing the DF PWB. reattaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-331
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Remarks: If the error is detected during job, the tray full is displayed and this service call will not
come up.
Turning on and off of DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 5s when
descending the DF tray.
7-332
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-333
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-334
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-335
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-336
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-337
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-338
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF
Staple Unit
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Upgrade the firmware Detaching
by using the latest upgrade pack immediately and
after replacing the DF PWB. reattaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-339
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the BF set sensor The BF set sensor is faulty. Execute U241 [Booklet] > [Set]. If the BF set Maintenanc
sensor does not operate properly, replace it. e Mode List
4 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-340
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-341
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Replacing the BF staple unit The BF staple motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Staple]. If the BF Maintenanc
staple motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace the BF staple unit.
5 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-342
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Replacing the BF main motor The BF main motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Blade]. If the BF Maintenanc
blade motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
5 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-343
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Replacing the BF staple motor The BF staple motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Booklet] > [Staple]. If the BF Maintenanc
staple motor does not operate properly, e Mode List
replace it.
5 Replacing the BF staple unit The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
6 Replacing the BF PWB The BF PWB is faulty. Replace the BF PWB.
7-344
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-345
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-346
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Replacing the PH PWB The PH PWB is faulty. Replace the PH PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PH PWB
(PH-7A/C/D
Installation
Guide)
3 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Upgrade the firmware Detaching
by using the latest upgrade pack immediately and
after replacing the DF PWB. reattaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
7-347
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-348
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-349
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-350
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-351
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-352
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-353
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB. Upgrade the firmware Detaching
by using the latest upgrade pack immediately and
after replacing the DF PWB. reattaching
the DF PWB
Firmware
Update
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest Firmware
version. version Update
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-354
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-355
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift upper limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift motor
ascend drive. That status was continued 5 times or more.
Object: Dual scan DP and mechanically reversed DP with the DP feed belt
Turning on of the DP lift lower limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift motor
descend drive. (The recovery is 3 times.)
7-356
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Replacing the DPSHD PWB The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
3 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DF PWB
7-357
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
4 Executing U411 DP scanning is not properly Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)] and [DP Maintenanc
adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. e Mode List
5 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then execute U091 Detaching
and U411. and
reattaching
the DP CIS
Maintenanc
e Mode List
6 Replacing the DPSHD PWB The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
Remarks: When detecting the DP feed-shift motor error (C9180) (up to 2 times), display J9002.
HP can't be detected even after the retrying process for the HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide for 3 times continu-
ously.
* HP detection of the DP feed-shift guide: When the DP feed-shift motor moves to HP, if HP can't be detected even driv-
ing the DP feed-shift motor for 1 round, the retry is done.
7-358
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
3 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
3 Replacing the DPSHD PWB The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
4 Replacing the DP relay PWB The DP relay PWB is faulty. Replace the DP relay PWB.
5 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-359
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM Maintenanc
faulty. data. e Mode List
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-360
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
6 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM Maintenanc
faulty. data. e Mode List
7 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Execute U026 to back up the SSD data. After Maintenanc
that, replace SSD and turn on the power e Mode List
while USB memory that contains the Detaching
firmware for the appropriate model is and
inserted to the main unit. reattaching
the SSD
8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.
7-361
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for main PWB ASIC at start up.
F022: System memory error (RAM read/write error, or ASIC memory error)
Error occurred when checking read/write of RAM for DP relay PWB ASIC at start up.
F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the
controller and the print engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB.
7-362
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (Scanner).
7-363
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-364
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-365
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7-366
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
Important
• Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after
turning the power off and then on.
F000 CF000 will be displayed if (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), * Execution of U024 will
* notes progress is and the connection state of a connector between vanish user data and the
carried out for a definite Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check. software installed.
period of time with a (2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Reinstallation is required.
Welcome screen.The U024) *
communication fault
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
between Panel-Main
operation check is performed.
boards.Communication
fault between Panel Core- (4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
Main Core Notes 2 (5) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
check.
(6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.
*: Only HDD standard model
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
F12X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine/DP<=>Main boards, * Execution of U024 will
Scan control section and the connection state of a connector, and perform an vanish user data and the
operation check. software installed.
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required.
(FULL of U024) *
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(4) Exchange a DP I/F, Engine and SHD board and perform
an operation check.
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
*: Only HDD standard model
7-367
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F14X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and * Execution of U024 will
FAX control part the connection state of a connector, and perform an vanish user data and the
operation check. software installed.
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required.
(FULL of U024) *
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(4) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by
U671. *1
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions
are required.)
(5) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
*1
(6) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
(7) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(8) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
*1: Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
F15X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between authentication device Authentication device: IC
an authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection situation of a card reader etc.
control section connector, and perform an operation check. * Execution of U024 will
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of vanish user data and the
U024) * software installed.
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Reinstallation is required.
operation check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F17X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of * Execution of U024 will
printer data control part U024) * vanish user data and the
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an software installed.
operation check. Reinstallation is required.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F18X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and * Execution of U024 will
Video control section the connection state of a connector, and perform an vanish user data and the
operation check.
software installed.
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Reinstallation is required.
U024) *
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(4) Exchange an Engine board and perform an
operation check.
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation
check.
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
7-368
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F21X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
an image-processing part U024) *
F22X
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F23X operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F24X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of F248 is the abnormalities of
the system Management U024) * a printer process.In recurring
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an by specific printer data,
operation check. please give me cooperation
at acquisition of capture data
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
and USBLOG.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F25X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of It may occur according to a
network management U024) * visitor's network
department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an environment.
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F26X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
the system Management U024) *
F27X Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F28X operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F29X
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F2AX (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F2BX Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
network control part U024) *
F2CX
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F2DX operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2EX
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F2FX * Only HDD standard model
F30X
F31X
F32X
7-369
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F34X Abnormality detecting (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and
in the Panel the connection state of a connector, and perform an
Management operation check.*1
Department (2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
U024) *
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(4) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation
check. * Notes
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
*1: A Dual Core CPU model and HyPAS model
F35X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
the printing controlling U024) *
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F37X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. *
the FAX Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
Department operation check.
(3) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by
U671.(Since it disappears when received data remain,
cautions are required.) * Notes
(4) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. *
Notes
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(6) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(7) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only SSD standard model
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
7-370
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F3AX Abnormality detecting (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
in the Entity U024) *
F3BX
Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F3CX Department operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3DX
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F3EX (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F3FX * Only HDD standard model
F40X
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X
F46X Abnormality detecting of a (1) Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of
printer rendering part (2) the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out(Depending a printer process.In recurring
on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) by specific printer data,
please give me cooperation
at acquisition of capture data
and USBLOG.
F47X Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
an image editing U024) *
F48X processing part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F49X operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F4AX Abnormality detecting of a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
printer rendering part U024) *
F4CX
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
7-371
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
F50X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the FAX Management U024) * immediately after occurrence
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F61X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
report creation part U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F63X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of
device control section U024) *
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F68X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of F684 is the overwrite error at
device control section U024) * the time of an HDD security
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an kit.
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F90X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the extension application U024) * immediately after occurrence
service part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
7-372
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
FC0X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
system application U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FC5X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Copy application U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FCAX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Print application U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FCFX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Send application U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FD4X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Box application U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
7-373
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
FDEX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
maintenance application U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FF7X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
report creation part U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FE5X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the extension application U024) * immediately after occurrence
printer (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FE9X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
the Application System U024) * immediately after occurrence
Management Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
FF9X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of Since the USB log
Service Cooperation U024) * immediately after occurrence
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an is needed for analysis, please
operation check. give me cooperation of
acquisition.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
7-374
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D: Abnormal detection at the FAX control section
(10) The FAX cannot be sent
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data:
7-375
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7-376
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7-377
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7-378
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
(1-12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4
size data :
7-379
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Error code
Error code Contents
U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted number. Or, sub address-
based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID
in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was
not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address
box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not
registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section problem
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN
signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
7-380
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7-381
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U00000/E00000
U00100/E00100
7-382
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U00200/E00200
U00300/E00300
U00430/E00430
U00431/E00431
U00432/E00432
U00433/E00433
7-383
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U00440/E00440
U00450/E00450
U00460/E00460
U00462/E00462
U00601/E00601
7-384
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U00613/E00613
U00656/E00656
U00690/E00690
U00800/E00800
U00811/E00811
7-385
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U00900/E00900
U01000/E01000
U01001/E01001
U01016/E01016
7-386
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01019/E01019
U01020/E01020
U01021/E01021
U01022/E01022
7-387
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01028/E01028
U01052/E01052
U01080/E01080
U01092/E01092
7-388
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01093/E01093
U01094/E01094
U01096/E01096
U01097/E01097
7-389
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01100/E01100
U01101/E01101
U01102/E01102
U01110/E01110
U01111/E01111
7-390
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01113/E01113
U01125/E01125
U01129/E01129
U01141/E01141
U01143/E01143
7-391
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01155/E01155
U01160/E01160
U01162/E01162
U01191/E01191
U01193/E01193
7-392
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01194/E01194
U01195/E01195
U01196/E01196
U01400/E01400
U01500/E01500
7-393
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01600/E01600
U01700/E01700
U01720/E01720
U01721/E01721
U01800/E01800
7-394
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U01810/E01810
U01820/E01820
U01821/E01821
U03000/E03000
U03200/E03200
7-395
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U03300/E03300
U03400/E03400
U03500/E03500
U03600/E03600
U03700/E03700
7-396
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U04000/E04000
U04100/E04100
U04200/E04200
U04300/E04300
U04400/E04400
7-397
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U04500/E04500
U05100/E05100
U05200/E05200
U05300/E05300
U14000/E14000
7-398
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
U14100/E14100
U19000/E19000
U19100/E19100
U19300/E19300
7-399
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
(1-3) When scanning the original loaded on the contact glass to send, the scanned data is
automatically sent.
7-400
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-401
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-402
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-403
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-404
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-405
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-406
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-407
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-408
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-409
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-410
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-411
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7-412
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7 - 6 Print Errors
No. Contents Condition
(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the
monochrome mode is set
(3) Color tone differs with the printed photo The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.
(4) Orientation is different
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(6) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(7) Data is output with monochrome Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print
from Windows Photo Viewer)
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver
and the main unit are mismatched.
(9) The same data is repeatedly printed out A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties
(11) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer The main unit locks up.
standby message is indicated
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main The main unit locks up.
unit startup error
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on
(13) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the
Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are main unit locks up.
lit
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.
(1)
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly
(2) connected.
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate
(3) properly.
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.
(4)
(18) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.
(5)
(19) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed. There is no error
(6) indication and print job will be held if print instruction is requested.
(20) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The main unit IP address is changed.
(7)
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting [Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be
(1) performed due to the error. (Can't print)
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting [Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The
(2) printing document is not output and the job is held.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting A PC does not recognize the main unit.
(3)
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting PC operation does not stabilize.
(4)
(25) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in
(5) the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
(26) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting The incorrect printer driver was selected.
(6)
7-413
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the setting Excel is not properly set up. Select 'Black & White' at [Color Mode] in the Printer
[Imaging] tab in the print settings at the PC. Driver
Next, overwrite the Excel data and close the Operation
window. And then, restart up. Guide
7-414
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-415
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
2 (When feeding from MP Paper is not properly set at Pull out the sub tray from the MP tray
tray) Resetting the MP the MP tray. and set the MP paper width guides to
paper width guides match the paper width then, confirm if
paper size shows correctly on the oper-
ation panel. ([Status/Job cancel] key >
[Paper/Supply]). If paper size is not dis-
played correctly, go to the next step
[Checking the actuator], and if dis-
played correctly, go to the step 5
[Changing the setting].
3 Checking the actuator Paper size is not detected Reattach the actuators for the paper
properly . width sensor and the paper length sen-
sor in the paper source.
4 Checking the sensor Paper size is not detected Check the paper width sensor and the
properly . paper length sensor in the paper
source, and reattach them if they come
off.
5 Changing the setting The printer driver is not set Set [Orientation] properly at the [Basic Printer
correctly. setting] of the printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
6 Reinstalling the printer The printer driver was not Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver. Printer
driver properly installed. Driver
Operation
Guide
7 Checking the print setting The print setting at the Set the print setting at the application
at the application software application software side software side properly.
side has the priority.
7-416
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-417
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-418
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties
The main unit is not ready to print
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to Check if the error appears on the operation
print panel or the error lamp blinks. Then if there
is, cancel it.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready to Resolve the problem at the main unit if any
print
(11) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated
The main unit locks up.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to After confirming no error is indicated on the
print main unit's operation panel, cancel all PC
print jobs. Then, turn the power switch and
the main power switch off . After 5s passes,
turn the main power switch and the power
switch on.
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error Processing/Memory
lamp is turned on
The main unit locks up.
7-419
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-420
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-421
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-422
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-423
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)
Condition:
・ PC OS: Windows 7
・ Print file: Test page
・ Connecting method: Wireless LAN
[Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be performed due to the error. (Can't print)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer Printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining. Driver
Operation
Guide
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (2)
Condition:
・ PC OS: Windows 7
・ Print file: Test page
・ Connecting method: Wireless LAN
[Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The printing document is not output and the job is held.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (3)
A PC does not recognize the main unit.
7-424
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (4)
PC operation does not stabilize.
(25) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (5)
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the
data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
(26) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (6)
The incorrect printer driver was selected.
(27) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (7)
Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when reinstalling it
7-425
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7-426
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
7 - 7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) Check the document processor' appears
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting the cassette and
checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting the cassette and
checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(7) The message 'Waste toner box is full.' is wrongly displayed
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
(10) The operation panel remains displaying 'Network device is starting'.
(11) The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed.
(12) The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'.
(13) Memory is full' is displayed at Scan to SMB.
(14) Check the toner container' is displayed while toner is available.
(15) The message "The toner container is not properly installed." appears frequently.
7-427
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
7-428
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
(2) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1, 2) even after removing/inserting
the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
7-429
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
(3) [The error occurred in the cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 3, 4) even after removing/inserting
the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
Object: Paper feeder or Large capacity feeder
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reinserting the PF primary The PF primary paper feed Pull out the PF primary feed unit and reinsert Detaching
paper feed unit unit is not inserted completely. it completely. and
reattaching
the PF
Pickup
Roller and
PF Feed
Roller
2 Checking the lift plate The PF lift plate does not rise Reattach the PF lift plate. If it is deformed,
up. replace it.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• PF lift motor 1, 2 - PF PWB "PWBs"
• PF PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906 Maintenanc
(Reset disable function) is executed, replace e Mode List
the PF lift motor 1 and 2. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF lift
motor
5 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the PF PWB
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
7-430
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
(5) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Opening/closing the right The right cover switch is not Open and close the right cover several
cover and replacing the right turned on since the right cover times. If the phenomenon reoccurs after that,
cover switch mounting plate / switch mounting plate is replace with the new right cover switch
right cover arm caught by the right cover arm. mounting plate (302ND0432_) and the new
right cover open/close arm (302ND2963_)
which have '1' or later of the last digit part
number.
2 Checking the right cover The covers are not fitted. When the right cover switch does not turn on
switch even if closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover, but check the
covers if the right cover switch turns on by
pushing directly. If the cover is not aligned
with the other exterior covers, reattach it.
When the switch does not always turn on, go
to the next step.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Right cover switch - Feed drive PWB "PWBs"
• Feed drive PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is faulty. Replace the right cover switch.
switch
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• MP paper sensor - Relay connector "PWBs"
• Relay connector - Feed drive PWB • Feed
drive PWB - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the MP paper
sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is not Reattach the MP paper sensor, and replace
sensor properly attached or it is faulty. it if it is not fixed.
4 Replacing the feed drive PWB The feed drive PWB is faulty. Replace the feed drive PWB.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-431
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
(8) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the wire The wire of the DP original When DP original sensor is always on due to
sensor is short-circuited. the short circuit of the wire, replace the wire.
2 Replacing the DP original The DP original sensor always Replace the DP original sensor.
sensor turns on.
3 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the DP PWB
(9) When DP is used, document no-feed occurs and [Replace all originals.] is displayed
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Reaffix the pad of the DP separation pulley
original is damaged and cover by holding the pad. If not repaired,
caught with the pad of the DP replace the DP separation pulley cover
retard pulley cover. (including the pad).
7-432
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
(11) The waste toner box is installed, but 'Install the waste toner box' is displayed.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the shutter section The urethane sponge in the Replace the shutter section of the waste
of the waste toner box shutter section is deformed by toner box with PARTS WTB SHUTTER
long term storage so that the ASSY SP (302ND9496_).
retention force of the waste
toner box has decreased.
2 Replacing the shutter section The urethane sponge in the Replace the shutter section of the waste 2ND-0073
of the waste toner box shutter section is deformed by toner box with PARTS WTB SHUTTER
long term storage so that the ASSY SP (302ND9496_).
retention force of the waste
toner box has decreased.
3 Replacing the waste toner box If the urethane sponge under Replace with the waste toner box for the field
the shutter section of the service (WT-8500).
waste toner box bundled in the
main unit is deformed and the
slide operation of the shutter
section becomes
unexpectedly smooth, the
force for keeping the waste
toner box is not enough.
Therefore, the waste toner box
shifts forward according to the
vibration of the main unit drive
and it is misdetected.
4 Checking the operation of the The weight detection actuator Detach the waste toner box unit and pull out
weight detection actuator is not attached properly, or the fixing pin at the machine rear side of the
switching operation of the unit to separate the unit to the metal plate
weight detection actuator is and the resin parts. Next, push the weight
not smooth since there are detection actuator on the metal plate by
burrs at the holes of the weight finger several times to switch. When
sensor case which inserts the performing the actuator switching operation
fulcrum shafts of the actuator. described previously, shift the weight
detection actuator horizontally. If the actuator
switching operation does not become
smooth after that, replace the waste toner
box unit and execute U155 [Calibration].
5 Reattaching the weight The weight detection spring Detach the waste toner box unit and pull out
detection spring has come off. the fixing pin at the machine rear side of the
unit to separate the unit to the metal plate
and the resin parts. Next, reattach the weight
detection spring attached to the machine
right side fulcrum shaft of the weight
detection actuator on the metal plate.
7-433
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
7 Replacing the waste toner box The parts inside the waste Replace the waste toner box unit and
unit toner box unit such as the execute U155 [Calibration].
waste toner motor, etc. is
faulty.
(12) The operation panel remains displaying 'Close the waste toner box cover'.
The waste toner box cover is closed but opening/closing is not detected.
6 Replacing the waste toner box The waste toner box unit is Replace the waste toner box unit and
unit faulty. execute U155 [Calibration].
7-434
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
3 Checking the OCR text Large volume originals are If OCR text recognition function is
recognition function scanned while the OCR text unnecessary, set [OCR Text Recognition] to
recognition is On. Off at [System Menu/Counter] key >
[Common Settings] > [Function Defaults].
Then, scan the originals again. If it is
necessary, set [File Separation] to [On] and
scan the originals separately.
4 (25/32 ppm models) Installing The memory is not enough. Install the HDD.
the HDD
(15) The message "The toner container is not properly installed." appears frequently.
Target: Toner container Y/C/M in the color models
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Affixing the sponges to the When the toner container When the message does not disappear even 2ND-0094
inside container cover fixing hooks of the container if reinstalling the toner containers repeatedly,
drive unit is broken or the affix 3 sponges (bundled in Part no.
toner container fixing hook at 302ND94A20) to the inside container cover
the machine rear side is fell Y/C/M.
down inward, toner container
Y/C/M cannot be retained in
the main unit specified
7-435
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7 - 8 Abnormal Noise
No. Contents Condition
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the
conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects,
improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (squeal sounds) The conductive bushing at the machine rear side of the lower exit
roller slide with the roller shaft.
(6) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit The drive joint gears between the fuser unit and the exit unit
(fluttering sounds) excessively engage and then teeth of the gears hit the bottom. At
that time, the exit actuator also vibrates.
(7) Abnormal sounds from the exit unit (cracking sounds) The exit reverse motor is faulty.
(8) Abnormal sound from the exit section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject section
(9) Fan rotating sounds are noisy Fan motor is dirty or faulty.
(10) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment
failure of the primary paper feed section
(11) Abnormal sound from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at
the MP feed section
(12) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser
exit section eject roller due to the smudges / foreign objects adhesion
(13) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft
section caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign objects.
(14) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (fluttering There is a large load when sliding the fuser belt and the parts in
sounds) the belt
(15) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit (cracking The cushion affixed in the cap of the fuser belt edge section is
sounds) peeled off.
(16) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between
the parts in the fuser section
(17) Abnormal sounds from the IH unit (buzzing sounds) When turning the power on, the buzzing sounds are noticed from
the IH unit at the upper right side of the main unit.
(18) Abnormal sound from inside the machine The drive failure of the toner container, opening/closing failure of
the toner supply shutter, the shortage of the toner amount or
aggregation of the toner.
(19) The tooth skipping sound from the toner container The tooth skipping sound occurs when setting up or at the toner
drive section container replacement.
(20) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in
the developer section
(21) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste
toner clogging in the drum section
(22) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign
sounds) objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the primary transfer
section
(23) The drive sounds are noisy during printing
(24) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying
section (Squeak sound)
(25) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth
jumping sounds)
(26) Abnormal sound from the waste toner forwarding unit
(27) Abnormal sounds from the main drive unit (1) The hooks at the lower side of the main drive unit come off,
therefore the tooth between the gear in the main drive unit and the
gear in the feed drive unit do not properly engage.
7-436
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7-437
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7-438
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
(6) Abnormal sounds from the fuser unit and exit unit (fluttering sounds)
The drive joint gears between the fuser unit and the exit unit excessively engage and then teeth of the gears hit the
bottom. At that time, the exit actuator also vibrates.
7-439
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7-440
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
(12) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the smudges / foreign objects
adhesion
(13) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the fuser exit sub roller and the shaft caused by the dirt or adhesion of the foreign objects.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit sub roller or the Clean the fuser exit sub roller, the shaft, etc., Detaching
grease bearings are dirty. Or, the and apply the heat resistant grease. and
foreign objects adhere. reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Fuser
Unit
7-441
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7-442
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
(19) The tooth skipping sound from the toner container drive section
The tooth skipping sound occurs when setting up or at the toner container replacement.
7-443
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
(24) The metallic sound from the PF horizontal conveying section (Squeak sound)
Object: Large capacity feeder
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the ground spring When the PF conveying roller Replace the ground spring. (SPRING
rotates, the sliding surface of GROUND BRIDGE A:303RC0617_, the last
the bearings that hooking the digit is 1 or newer)
PF conveying roller and the
ground spring is vibrating
fractionally.
7-444
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
(25) Abnormal sound when driving the transfer belt (Tooth jumping sounds)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or the Clean the drive gears and the bearings of the
grease foreign object is adhered. primary transfer unit, and apply the grease
(EM-50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H) or
Hanarl (302LV94550). (If they are conductive
bearings, apply Hanarl.)
2 Replacing the main drive unit The gear section of the Replace the main drive unit. Detaching
developer K/transfer belt and
motor and the gear engaged reattaching
are scraped. Or, the drive of the Main
the parts in the main drive unit Drive Unit
are faulty.
7-445
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
4 Replacing the scanner motor The gear of the scanner motor Replace the scanner motor.
is damaged by pinching
foreign objects, etc.
(31) Abnormal sounds from the bridge unit (cracking sounds when conveying the paper)
Condition: When installing the bridge unit (AK-7110)
The BR conveying pulley is damaged, dirty or foreign objects adhere.
7-446
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
(32) The high frequency sounds are generated from the low voltage PWB when entering into the
sleep mode in the main unit with the optional NIC.
Condition: The sleep level is set to [Quick Recovery] when installing the ID card reader, IB-50, IB-
51, IB-35 or Printing System 15.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 (In case the sleep level The sleep level is not set to Set 'Sleep Level' to [Energy Saver] at Date/Timer/
change is acceptable) [Energy Saver]. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/ Energy
Changing the settings Energy Saver]. Then, change the setting of Saver
the objective optional NIC to [On] at [Sleep (Operation
Rules]. Guide -
Note: However, in case of the main unit with Section 8)
the ID card reader, it becomes impossible to
recover the main unit even if scanning the ID
card after this setting change. Please explain
a user who should press the [Energy] key on
the operation panel to recover the main unit.
2 (In case the sleep level The low voltage PWB does not Replace with the low voltage PWB with '1' Detaching
change is not acceptable) support this conditions. and after of the last digit part number. and
Replacing the low voltage • 25/32 ppm models for 110V/120V: reattaching
PWB 302L794131 the Scanner
Wires
• 35 ppm or faster models for 110V/120V:
302ND94611
• 25/32 ppm models for 220-240V:
302L794141
• 35 ppm or faster models for 220-24V:
302ND94621
In use of the above low voltage PWB, [Quick
Recovery] sleep level can be set when
installing the objective optional NIC.
7-447
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7 - 9 Malfunction
No. Contents Condition
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or
not displayed
(2) The MP tray paper size is misdetected
(3) The controller fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: Malfunction such as the abnormal image
output due to heated CPU)
(4) The developer fan motor does not rotate (Final phenomenon: The printing operation of the main unit is
frequently interrupted to cool the machine inside according to the
inner temperature increase during the continuous printing.)
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the
power switch
(6) Toner falls over the paper conveying section (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)
(7) No display in the operation main panel (Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel
and does not change main PWB cantbedone.'
(9) No action by pressing the operation panel
(10) The login fails with other than the ID card
(11) The original size on the original glass is misdetected. A4 size original is displayed as A3 size when loading it on the
contact glass and closing the platen cover
(12) The container cover is not opened although the toner
container is not installed.
(13) The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel
even if installing the FAX PWB.
(14) The operation panel does not display the finisher even
if installing the finisher
(15) The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if The JS actuator (at the job separator) continues to turn the JS
removing the paper from the JS tray sensor (at the main unit) on while there is no paper.
(16) Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed
on the operation panel.
7-448
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
Content of Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Object: Main unit, Paper feeder
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the actuator The actuator does not operate Check if the actuator for the paper length
properly. sensor operates when inserting the cassette.
If it does not properly operate, reattach the
actuator.
2 Checking the paper length The paper length sensor or the Reattach the paper length sensor or the fan
sensor and fan shaped arm fan shaped arm does not shaped arm.
operate correctly.
3 Checking the detected paper When inserting the cassette After inserting the cassette vigorously into Cassette /
size on the operation panel vigorously into the main unit the main unit with a large amount of paper MP Tray
with a large amount of paper loaded in the cassette, check the paper size Settings
loaded in the cassette, the of the target cassette which is detected on (Operation
paper width guide temporarily the operation panel. ([Status/Job Cancel] key Guide -
deflects, the angle of the > [Paper/Supplies]) If the paper size in the Section 8)
switching lever for the paper cassette is not detected, pull out the cassette
width sensor shifts, and the and insert the cassette with the normal
paper width sensor does not strength. If it does not reoccur, please
turn on correctly. explain to the user not to insert the cassette
vigorously. If there is concern about
reoccurrence by the same operation after
that, specify the paper size of the target
cassette instead of [Auto]. ([System Menu/
Counter] key > [Cassette/MP tray Settings] >
[Cassette 1 (to 5)])
4 Attaching the countermeasure If the cassette base is bent Attach PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY 2ND-0085
part to LEVER SIDE SWITCH due to the shock when SP (302L79423_) to LEVER SIDE SWITCH
A inserting the cassette strongly, A.
the amount of shifting LEVER
SIDE SWITCH at the cassette
base bottom is insufficient. As
a result, the paper width
sensor is not turned On.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• Paper length sensor - Feed drive PWB "PWBs"
• Paper width sensor - Feed drive PWB
• Feed drive PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the paper length The paper length sensor is Replace the paper length sensor.
sensor faulty.
7 Replacing the paper width The paper width sensor is Replace the paper width sensor.
sensor faulty.
8 Replacing the feed drive PWB The feed drive PWB is faulty. Replace the feed drive PWB.
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-449
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
3 Replacing the controller fan The controller fan motor is Replace the controller fan motor. Fan Motors
motor faulty. Attachable
Direction
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-450
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
(5) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch
7-451
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7-452
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7-453
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
(8) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change
Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel main PWB can’t be done.
7-454
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
3 Checking the original size The original size sensor does Reattach the original size sensor. If not
sensor not operate properly. repaired, replace it.
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
7-455
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
(12) The container cover is not opened although the toner container is not installed
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the connection The connector is not Select U033 [Container Cover] and press the Maintenanc
connected properly, or the [Start] key to check the container solenoid e Mode List
wire is faulty. operation. When it does not operate, reinsert
the connector to the container solenoid. If the
wire is faulty, repair or replace it.
2 Replacing the container The container solenoid is Check if the container solenoid has
solenoid faulty. continuity, and if there is no continuity,
replace the container solenoid.
3 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connectors on the feed Service
PWB image PWB. If the wire is faulty, repair or Manual -
replace the wire. If not repaired after that, Section 8
replace the feed image PWB. 'PWBs'
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector is not Reconnect the wire connectors on the Service
connected properly. The wire engine PWB. If the wire is faulty, repair or Manual -
or the PWB is faulty. replace it. If not repaired after that, replace Section 8
the engine PWB. 'PWBs'
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(13) The FAX icon is not displayed on the operation panel even if installing the FAX PWB
2 Checking the FAX firmware The FAX firmware is not latest. Check the FAX firmware version at U019. If Maintenanc
version not latest, upgrade the FAX firmware to the e Mode List
latest version. Firmware
Update
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not installed Reinstall the FAX PWB. If not repaired, FAX
properly, or faulty. replace the FAX PWB. Installation
Guide
4 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connectors on the main Service
PWB. If the wire is faulty, repair or replace Manual -
the wire. If not repaired after that, replace the Section 8
main PWB. 'PWBs'<br>
Detaching
and
reattaching
the Main
PWB
7-456
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
(14) The operation panel does not display the finisher even if installing the finisher
Object: 4000-sheet finisher
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power The finisher does not operate Turn the power switch and the main power
properly. switch off . After 5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power switch on.
2 Checking the connection The connection between the Reinstall the finisher to the main unit. If the Service
finisher and the main unit is connector or wire is faulty, repair or replace Manual -
faulty. it. Section 9
'Wiring
diagram
(Options
connection)'
3 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Reconnect the wire connectors on the DF Service
PWB. If not repaired, replace the DF PWB Manual -
and then upgrade the DF firmware to the Section 9
latest version by using the USB device 'Wiring
memory which contains the latest diagram
enhancement firmware pack. (Options
connection)'
Firmware
Update
7-457
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
(15) The Job separator LED continuously turns on even if removing the paper from the JS tray
The JS actuator (at the job separator) continues to turn the JS sensor (at the main unit) on while there is no paper.
2 Checking the JS actuator The shaft of the JS actuator Reattach the JS actuator. If the shaft is
comes off or is deformed. deformed, replace the JS actuator.
3 Reattaching COVER TOP The JS actuator at the job Shift COVER TOP REAR (302ND0411_)
REAR separator which the installing downward and secure it with the screw.
position is followed to COVER
TOP REAR cannot interrupt
the JS sensor light since
COVER RTOP REAR is
attached shifting upward.
4 Reattaching the JS sensor The JS actuator cannot Adjust the position of attaching the JS sensor
mounting plate interrupt the JS sensor light mounting plate (302ND0493_) in the vertical
since the JS sensor is direction so that the photo-interruption part of
attached shifting from the the JS actuator inserts into the center of the
proper position. detection part of the JS sensor.
5 Replacing the JS actuator The photo-interruption part of Replace the JS actuator (302ND04271) with
the JS actuator is caught by the shape changed so that it does not
the edge of the detection part contact the edge of the detection part of the
on the JS sensor and then it JS sensor.
cannot return while remaining
paper detection On.
6 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire Service
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If Manual -
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire. Section 8
• JS sensor - Feed image PWB 'PWBs'
• Feed image PWB - Engine PWB
7 Checking the JS sensor The JS sensor does not Replace the JS sensor.
operate properly.
8 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is faulty. Replace the feed image PWB.
PWB
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Detaching
and
reattaching
the Engine
PWB
(16) Even if the paper feeder is installed, it is not displayed on the operation panel
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power The paper feeder does not Turn the power switch and the main power
operate properly. switch off . After 5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power switch on.
2 Checking the connection The connection between the Reinstall the paper feeder to the main unit. If Service
paper feeder and the main unit the drawer connector pins or the wire is Manual -
is faulty due to the faulty, repair or replace them. Section 9
deformation of the drawer 'Wiring
connector pins, etc. diagram
(Options
connection)'
7-458
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7-459
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7 - 10 Others
(1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit and the paper width guides
(1-1) Adjusting the center position for the punch unit
1 Adjust the center position of the punch unit (A) based on the MP tray.
1 Pull out the inner finisher from the main unit.
2 Remove the screw (B) and detach the punch unit cover (C).
5 Repeat Step2-3 till the punch holes are located within the reference value.
[Reference value (d)] (The reference value (e) cannot be adjusted.)
• For Metric: d=40.0mm±2mm, e=80mm±0.5mm
• For Inch: d=34.93mm±2mm (1.38in±0.08in), e=69.85mm±0.5mm (2.75in±0.02in)
d
e
7-460
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
B(M3x8)
7-461
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
(1-2) Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjusting the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray)
Adjust the center position for each paper source (except the MP tray) based on the center position for the punch unit
after finishing the adjustment at Step 1).
[Adjusting the center position for the cassettes in the main unit / PF-7100]
1 Perform the test copy by feeding paper from each paper source.
2 Loosen the fixing screw (E) of the pinion gear (D) that secures the center position for the paper width guides
when the punch holes shift.
3 Relocate the paper width guide (F) of the machine rear side in the counter direction of the punch holes shifted.
• When the punch holes shift in the machine rear direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in the machine
front direction.
• When the punch holes shift in the machine front direction, relocate the paper width guides (F) in the machine
rear direction.
5 Put paper on the cassette, and relocate the paper width guides at the machine front and rear sides along the
paper width.
D
F
6 Repeat Step 1-5 till the punch holes locate within the reference value.
d
e
7-462
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
(2) Alignment for affixing PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SP (For PF-7110)
[Part]
Part No: 303RC94080 (3RC94080)
Part name: PARTS SHEET DECK FEED SET SP
Q'ty / 1 unit: 1
Remark
• For the PF feed frame in the left cassette: Film A with PORON® x 2 pcs
• For the PF feed frame in the right cassette: Film B with PORON® x 2 pcs
A B
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
40 mm
39 mm
Affixing location
Following PF feed frames for the left and right cassettes in PF-7110 (Large capacity feeder)
• Left cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER (303RC0603_)
• Right cassette: FRAME FEED LOWER B (303RC0613_)
Step for affixing
1 Locate the up-vertical and horizontal affixing location for the films with PORON® and clean there with alcohol.
2 Remove the sheet from the PORON (a) and affix the PORON(a) faster than other parts.
3 Affix other parts (film) than PORON (a) and press them surely.
4 After affixing, pull out and reinsert the cassette multiple times to confirm the film with PORON® does not
contact the neighboring parts.
B a
A B
7-463
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
b
e
d
a
Horizontal alignment for the PF feed frame
Align the films with PORON to the PF feed frame horizontally for the left cassette(A) and the right cassette(B).
0 mm
0.5 mm
A 0.5 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm
B
0.5 mm
0 mm
7-464
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2.Error 1030 is Timeout for Fiery Printing system is not powered. Check power cable connection or
displayed. Ready signal not replace.
1 received. DVI cable between Fiery Print Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
Controller and MFP is
disconnected.
3.Error 1031 is Receiving VIDEO from DVI cable between Fiery Print Re-insert/replace DVI cable.
displayed. Fiery fails. Controller and MFP is
(IP Exchange failure) disconnected.
Bridge board error. Replace Bridge Board.
4.Error 1040 is LINKLOCAL Network cable between Fiery Re-insert/replace network cable.
displayed. connection fails. Print Controller and MFP is
disconnected.
Network setting failure. Check network settings.
IPv6: ON
HTTP: ON
Enhanced WSD: ON
5.Error 2000 is Mismatch of Product Unsupported Fiery Print Install supported Fiery Print
displayed. ID from Fiery. Controller is installed. Controller. (Use with correct
combination)
6.Error 2010 is Comet FPGA version Unsupported Bridge Board is Replace Bridge Board.
displayed. mismatch. installed.
7.Error 3000 is Timeout of ERPD Bad data in IP Exchange. Turn on MFP power again.
displayed. Server boot-up of Replace Bridge Board.
External RIP Protocol.
Replace Main Board.
Replace Fiery Print Controller.
7-465
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7-466
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
10.Printing is not Defective bridge Bridge board mounting error. Replace the bridge board.
possible with Command board.
Work Station. Defective main board. Main board mounting error. Replace the main board.
3
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in the Replace the Printing system.
system. Printing system.
11.An abnormal printing Connection error of Defective cable or poor Reinsert the connector. Also check
occurs when printing the harness between contact. for continuity within the connector
from Command Work the Main board and cable. If none, replace the cable.
Station. the Bridge board
(damaged or loose
connected).
Defective bridge Bridge board mounting error. Replace the bridge board and check
board. for correct operation.
The image data is not Engine board mounting error. Replace the engine board and check
entered. for correct operation.
Defective main board. Main board mounting error. Replace the main board and check
for correct operation.
Defective Printing Board mounting failure in the Replace the Printing system and
system. Printing system. check for correct operation.
*:1: If the error display does not disapperar after 3 minutes, it is a failure.
*:2: If one of Error 1 to 7 is displayed, execute the respective treatment. If Fiery is not displayed while none of
Error 1 to 7 is not displayed, check if the Fiery displayed is enabled on Home of the MFP operation panel.
If the erroer is not indicated on the MFP operation panel, check the PC's netork setting.
*:3: If one of Error 1 to 7 is displayed, execute the respective treatment. If the erroer is not indicated on the
MFP operation panel, check the PC's netork setting.
7-467
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0073
Part No. 302ND94960
Part Name PARTS WTB SHUTTER ASSY SP
Remark
No Procedure Detail
1 Detach the waste toner box from the machine.
Figure 1
While widening the hook (b) again at the d
position (Figure 1 to the right) where the
shutter (c) stops naturally and widen the hook
(e) of the shutter attachment plate (d), then
release the inside hook (f) of the shutter (c) c
one by one. (Photo to the right shows that the
4
condition of releasing the right inside hook (f)
first)
e
After that, detach the shutter ass'y (g: f
302ND94960) by sliding in the front direction
g
of the machine.
7-468
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
No Procedure Detail
d
Shutter ass'y (g)
h
Note: i
After installation, make sure that the hooks (b)
on both sides are securely engaged. (Refer to
the Figure. 2 to the right)
Figure 2
(Machine left side) (Machine right side)
b b
7-469
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0076
Note:
If the print operation is done when the pressure releasee gear comes off, the abnormal image (missing image,
light image, etc. Refer to [Fig.1].) or service call error C2700 (the primary/secondary transfer pressure release
error) might occur. And once the event log is printed, the history of service call below might remain on the list.
- C7601, C7602: ID sensor error - C7620: Auto color registration error
- C7611 to C7614: Bias calibration read value error - C5130 to C5134: Primary transfer high-voltage error
7-470
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0085
LEVER SIDE
Peel off the double sided tape mount SWITCH A Cleaning position
of PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY
SP (302L794230) and affix the
surface of LEVER SIDE SWITCH A
which was cleaned with alcohol.
2 (Refer to the drawing 1 for the affixing Cleaning position
position)
After affixing it, press whole part of [Drawing 1]
PARTS CASSETTE LEVER ASSY SP
by finger and make sure it adheres to Align at the edge
LEVER SIDE SWITCH A.
0.5mm 0mm
0.5mm
7-471
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0089_1
2 washers
7-472
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0089_2
[Figure 1]
7-473
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0090
Replacement procedure
Estimate work time: 30 minutes
No Procedure Detail
7-474
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
No Procedure Detail
[Low-end model]
[High-end model]
[Note] d
(-->) If trying to detach the main drive unit
7 without hanging the connector in the hook [Main drive unit]
(d), the connector wire interferes with the
waste toner joint and the sensor cleaning
spring in the waste toner joint gets
deformed, then it might be the possibility
to make wrong detection of the waste
toner full or the waste toner clog.
Waste toner joint
7-475
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
No Procedure Detail
[Low-end model]
[High-end model]
[Low-end model]
(-->) Remove six (6) screws (a) (M3 x 8) from [High-end model]
9 the main drive unit(b)
7-476
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
No Procedure Detail
Lift up the hook (b) of the waste toner
joint (a) and release the stopper (c), and
pull it out towards the front side.
[Waste toner joint (a)]
[Note when detaching the main drive
unit]
- If trying to detach the main drive unit Spring
without pulling out the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning spring in the (Rear side of
(-->) joint gets deformed andthen there the machine)
10 might be the possibility to make wrong
detection of the waste toner full or the
waste toner clog. Therefore, pull the
waste toner joint (a) out towardsthe
front side before detaching the main
drive unit.
- When pulling the waste toner joint (a)
out towards the front side, be careful
that the cleaning spring in the joint does
not get deformed.
[Low-end model]
(-->)
11 Detach the main drive unit(b).
[High-end model]
7-477
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0092
Remark
Part B
Part A
Part E
(Brand new is bundled.)
Part D Part C
Monochrome model
Part No. 302ND15500
Part Name PIN CONTAINER JOINT
Use at Step 21.
When the gear tooth jumping sound from the container drive unit occurs, be sure to
Remark
insert this pin into the container drive unit at the same timing of replacing with the
container rail unit for service.
7-478
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
c
b
7-479
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7-480
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7-481
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
b
Release the bundled wire (a) at the right
12 side of the container rail unit from the
binding band (b) x 5 a
7-482
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7-483
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7-484
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
7-485
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
a D cut
b
Groove
Groove
Until the projection in the boss hole fits into Projection
the groove of the positioning pin (Click feeling
available), insert the positioning pin into the (Container drive unit for the monochrome model
boss hole
after inserting the positioning pin (a)
c b
7-486
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
Remark
Part B
Part A
Part E
(Brand new is bundled.)
Part D Part C
Monochrome model
Part No. 302ND15500
Part Name PIN CONTAINER JOINT
Use at Step 21.
When the gear tooth jumping sound from the container drive unit occurs, be sure to
Remark
insert this pin into the container drive unit at the same timing of replacing with the
container rail unit for service.
7-487
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Others
2ND-0094
Remark
[Sponges]
Straight
line
side
Clean with alcohol the circle shapes of
the inside of container cover Y/C/M.
Remove the release paper from the
double-faced tape of the sponges, and
then affix the sponges so that the
straight line side faces the upside of
the container covers.
2 Note:
Be sure not to affix the sponge to the
inside of container cover K.
Toner container K is longer than other
toner containers, therefore, if closing
container cover K with the sponge, the (After affixing)
parts at the toner container K machine Container cover Y/C/M
rear side might be deformed or
damaged.
7-488
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8PWBs
8 - 1 Description for PWB
(1) Main PWB
(1-1) PWB photograph
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
1
YC33
10
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
8-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
Low Model
8-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1
1 1
6 1
A15 A1 YC22
YC9 YC10 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 40 1 41 1 17 B1 B15 1 12
Low Model
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 41 1 17 1 11 1 12
8-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
B1 B18 1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A18 YC19 A1
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
8-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
Low-end model
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
2 +24V3 I DC24V DC24V power input
3 +24V3 I DC24V DC24V power input
4 +24V2 I DC24V DC24V power input
5 +24V2 I DC24V DC24V power input
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 +24V3_IL O DC24V DC24V power output
2 +24V3 O DC24V DC24V power output
YC3 1 +24V4 O DC24V DC24V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 O DC24V DC24V power output
8-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
8-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
Low Model
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
8 20
YC14
1
Low Model
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
8-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
4
YC3 YC2 1
1 1
17
YC1 YC2 YC1
20
1 17 1
8-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
Low-end model
• YC1: Engine PWB
• YC2: Feed image PWB
8-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
1 13
YC1
8-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
100-120V 220-240V
Low-end model
100-120V 220-240V
8-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8
YC2 12
3 1 1 1 2
1 2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 1
YC5
YC3
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
8-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
High Model
Low Model
1 7 YC9
A1 A15
YC6
10 1 5 1
1 40 1 12
YC5 YC4
YC11 YC13
1 7 YC9
A1 A15
YC6
4
YC10
1
1
10 1 5 1
1 40
YC5 YC4
YC11
8-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
High-end Model
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC4 1 VCC O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 NFC_SWCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
4 NFC_SWDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
5 NIRQ I DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal
8-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
Low-end model
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC4 1 VCC O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 NFC_SWCLK O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C clock signal
4 NFC_SWDA I/O DC0V/3.3V(pulse) I2C data signal
5 NIRQ I DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal
8-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
(10) IH PWB
(10-1) PWB photograph
100-120V
220-240V
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC1 YC6
1
8-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
FSR1
1 3
YC1
8-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
YC9
YC4
12
1
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
17 1
YC3 YC5
16
8-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
YC9
YC4
12
1
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
8-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
1 YC12 3 1 YC11 4
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1 YC15 1
2
YC2 19
4
1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
8-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
16
YC11
12
YC3
1
4
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
8-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4
14 B1 1
1
B13
YC8
8-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
7
YC25
1
YC1
1 40
8-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
1 3 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 15
YS11
YC1
16
1 3 1 4 1 8
YC7 YC8 YC9
8-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4
14 B1 1
1
B13
YC8
8-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
20 1 3 1 12 1
YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC10
1 YC6
12
4 A1 A15
2
YC14 YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 U3 B15 B1
1
3 1 4 1
8-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
3
YC1
YC5
1
1 1
YC2
3
8-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
YC4
YC2
8
11
11 1 YC1
YC3 4 1
8-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
11 1
1 18
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
YC12
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
5 1
YC3 YC7
YC9
1
8 1
19 1
8-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
YC2
20
11
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
8-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
1
1 YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1
20 10
1 YC13
1
2 YC15
YC4
1
6
YC16
7
4
YC3
1
7
4
YC7
YC5
1
1
1 15
YC20
30 16
8-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
8-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
20 1 3 1 13 1
YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC10
1 YC6
YC14 12
A1
2 4 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 U3 B15 B1
1
3 1 6 1
8-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
YC28
1 1
B1 A16
YC42 7
YC15
12
16
B16 A1 10
5 YC23
YC14
YC41
1
1
1
6 16
YC7
YC30
1
19
YC6 1
1
19 8 4
YC8 YC25
YC31 1
1
12 9
1 1
YC12 11 1 36 16 30
8 19 YC38
YC11 5 1 YC36 YC37 1
1 18 1 15 9 YC21 1
8-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
1
YC6 4 YC10 3 YC17 1 1 YC23 4
20 1 1
1 YC13 10
YC15
1
7
YC19
YC16
1
7
4
1
YC3 YC11
1 1
4
1
7 YC26
4
YC7 3
YC5
1 YC22
1 6
1
YC25 6
3 1 1 YC18 YC20
16
30
8-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9Appendixes
9 - 1 Repetitive defects gauge
9-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
Note
Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the
parametervalues before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values,
send the FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.
(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
9-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
ANK outline font size at start-up* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 12
Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99
V2 Decimal value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
ANK outline font name at start-up* V3 ANK outline font name at power-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font size (100 V V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font size at start- 0
model only)* up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up 10
Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up 0
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial Kanji outline font name (100V V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMINCHO
model only)* -W3
9-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9-154
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands
9-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
9-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
9-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the Image quality
following adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
• Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
• Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Using DP: ±2.0%
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Magnificaiton Copy: ±2.0%
• Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Using DP: ±2.5%
• Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
• MTF correction Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
• Input gamma in color mode
Copy: 2.0mm or less
• Color correction matrix Using DP: 2.5mm or less
• Input gamma in monochrome mode Skewed paper feed (left-right difference) Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less (table)
1.5mm /100mm or less (DP)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
the following adjustments are automatically made: ±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
Copy: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
In case of running this test chart, clean the feed rollers with alcohol in advance and ensure the DP width guides are correctly
positioned against the original. ±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
• Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
• Adjusting the DP trailing edge registration (U071)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the printed out test chart, the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
9-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
Adjusting
Item Image Setting procedure Remarks
order
12 Skew image adjustment (diagonal to 1 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8).
the main scan direction) A
[Original]
B
(scanning adjustment) 2 Remove rib (c) at front side and remove
upper right cover (b) in the direction of the b
arrow.
Adjust the height of the scanner unit. P rin tin g d ire ctio n
3 Remove the screw (e) that fixes the ISU
C D adjustment plate (d).
a
4 Shift the ISU adjustment plate (d) in the
[Output image W [Output image X
(A/C side is downward.)] (B/D side is downward.)] adjustment direction. a
A B A B
5 Estimate amount of movement:
Sliding the ISU adjustment plate (d) c
changes the horizontal lines 0.26 mm on
the A/C side and 0.25 mm on the B/D
side.
C D C D d
6 In case that horizontal line goes down to
A/C side (Copy image A)
->Shift ISU adjustment plate (d) in the
direction (X).
7 In case that horizontal line goes down to e
B/D side (Copy image B)
X
Y
->Raise the ISU adjustment plate (d) by
shifting it in the direction of the arrow Y.
8 Tighten the screw (e) after the adjustment
is completed.
9 Attach upper right cover (b) to the main
9-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
9 - 4 Wiring diagram
(1) Engine PWB / Feed Drive PWB
(1-1) Low-end model
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 2 2 EX_SENS
NC 9 9 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
13 13 GND
14 14 TN_FAN_REM
9-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 2 2 EX_SENS
NC 9 9 3 3 +5V2
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
2 Relay 1 2 Relay 1
NC 5 5 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner absorption fan motor GND 2
3
Relay 2 13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
24V 1
2 2
Vibration motor K 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor M 1 1 Feed image PWB (1/6)
2 2
Vibration motor C 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor Y 1 1
Main drive
9-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K YC16
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K DP PWB 16 1 B16 B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
GND 3 3 3 3 GND YC16 15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K +24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K +24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND +24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY Relay
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
BD 12 12 12 12 BD DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK 5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P2 14 14 14 14 P2 DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0 DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAP2_M 18 18 18 18 DATAP2_M DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
DATAN2_M 19 19 19 19 DATAN2_M DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
GND 20 20 20 20 GND DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAP1_M 21 21 21 21 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 22 22 22 22 DATAN1_M DP
GND 23 23 23 23 GND
SD_CLK 24 24 24 24 SD_CLK
P4_Col 25 25 25 25 P4_Col
CSI_C 26 26 26 26 CSI_C
CSY_Y 27 27 27 27 CSY_Y YC4 YC1
A16 A16 GND
INT_ST 28 28 28 28 INT_ST +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU A15 A15 GND
SET
CSI_M
29
30
29
30
29
30
29
30
SET
CSI_M
BD
NC
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
BD
NC
PD PWB 3.3V 3 3 A14 Relay A14 3.3V2
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
DIO 32 32 32 32 DIO
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI 34 34 34 34 DOI
GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI 36 36 36 36 SKOI YC5 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4
CSO 38 38 38 38 CSO PGND 2 2 4 4 GND
3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_C 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_C
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor Original size timing sensor GND 2 2 A7 A7 GND
Vout 1 1 A6 A6 PLT_OPEN
DATAN2_C 41 41 41 41 DATAN2_C POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
DATAP1_C 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_C
B/ 4 4 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAN1_C 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_C YC7
A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
GND 45 45 45 45 GND TH 1 1 2 2 TH
DATAP2_Y 46 46 46 46 DATAP2_Y NC 2 2 LSU thermistor Scanner motor A/ 3 3
DATAN2_Y 47 47 47 47 DATAN2_Y GND 3 3 1 1 GND B 2 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
2
GND 48 48 48 48 GND A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
A 1 1
DATAP1_Y 49 49 49 49 DATAP1_Y A1 A1 GND
DATAN1_Y 50 50 50 50 DATAN1_Y
YC6
CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
DSI_CIS_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
APC PWB DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN
24
23
24
23
17
18
17
18
DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
DSI_CIS_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
DSI_CIS_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N
LED PWB GND
AFE_RD
16
15
16
15
25
26
25
26
GND
AFE_RD
GND 14 14 27 27 GND
AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
YC3 GND 12 12 29 29 GND
YC27
AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU YC1 YC3
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃 䢳 䢳 䢳 䢳 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃
GND
GND
3
4
3
4
6
5
6
5
GND
GND
Laser scanner unit(2 beam) 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅 䢴 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅
AFE_CS
GND
9
8
9
8
32
33
32
33
AFE_CS
GND
AFE_MCLK_P 7 7 34 34 AFE_MCLK_P
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A LED Front AFE_MCLK_N 6 6 35 35 AFE_MCLK_N
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B GND 5 5 36 36 GND
+24V4 7 7 2 2 +24V4 NC 4 4 37 37 NC
PGND 8 8 1 1 PGND +5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
YC1 YC2 +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃 䢳 䢳 䢳 䢳 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃
䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅 䢴 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅
CCD PWB
YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Low power voltage PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP Image scanner unit
9-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K DP PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
GND 3 3 3 3 GND YC6
15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P2 14 14 14 14 P2
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAP4_K 18 18 18 18 DATAP4_K
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
DATAN4_K 19 19 19 19 DATAN4_K
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAP3_K 21 21 21 21 DATAP3_K
DATAN3_K
GND
22
23
22
23
22
23
22
23
DATAN3_K
GND
DP
SD_CLK 24 24 24 24 SD_CLK
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU A16 A16 GND
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM BD 3 3 2 2 BD PD PWB A15
Relay
A15 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC NC 2 2 3 3 NC 3.3V 3 3 A14 A14 3.3V2
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4
CS0_KM 38 38 38 38 CS0_KM
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
PGND
POL_REM
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
3
PGND
START/STOP
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
DATAP2_M
DATAN2_M
40
41
40
41
40
41
40
41
DATAP2_M
DATAN2_M
POL_RDY 4 4 2 2 LOCKED Original size timing sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M B/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
GND 45 45 45 45 GND 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
B 3 4 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
DATAP4_M
DATAN4_M
46
47
46
47
46
47
46
47
DATAP4_M
DATAN4_M TH
YC7
1 1 2 2 TH
Scanner motor A 4 3 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
2 A1 A1 GND
GND
DATAP3_M
48
49
48
49
48
49
48
49
GND
DATAP3_M
NC 2 2 LSU thermistor A/ 6 1
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M
YC6
YC10 YC2 CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1
GND
DATAP4_C
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
GND
DATAP4_C
NC
CLN_MOT_B
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
LSU cleaning motor
DATAN4_C 3 3 3 3 DATAN4_C
GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC1 YC36
DATAP3_C 5 5 5 5 DATAP3_C +12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
DATAN3_C 6 6 6 6 DATAN3_C +12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
GND 7 7 7 7 GND +12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
DATAP2_C 8 8 8 8 DATAP2_C +12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
DATAN2_C 9 9 9 9 DATAN2_C NC 36 36 5 5 NC
GND 10 10 10 10 GND LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
DATAP1_C 11 11 11 11 DATAP1_C GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DATAN1_C 12 12 12 12 DATAN1_C DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
GND 13 13 13 13 GND DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
INT_ST_YC 14 14 14 14 INT_ST_YC GND 31 31 10 10 GND
SET_YC 15 15 15 15 SET_YC DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
CSI_C 16 16 16 16 CSI_C DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
GND 17 17 17 17 GND GND 28 28 13 13 GND
DIO_YC 18 18 18 18 DIO_YC DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
GND 19 19 19 19 GND DSI_CIS_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N
DOI_YC 20 20 20 20 DOI_YC GND 25 25 16 16 GND
GND 21 21 21 21 GND DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
SKOI_YC 22 22 22 22 SKOI_YC DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 23 23 23 23 GND GND 22 22 19 19 GND
CSO_YC 24 24 24 24 CSO_YC DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
GND 25 25 25 25 GND DSI_CIS_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N
DATAP4_Y 26 26 26 26 DATAP4_Y GND 19 19 22 22 GND
DATAN4_Y 27 27 27 27 DATAN4_Y DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
GND 28 28 28 28 GND DSI_CIS_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N
DATAP3_Y 29 29 29 29 DATAP3_Y GND 16 16 25 25 GND
DATAN3_Y 30 30 30 30 DATAN3_Y AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
GND 31 31 31 31 GND
DATAP2_Y 32 32 32 32 DATAP2_Y LED PWB GND
AFE_WD
14
13
14
13
27
28
27
28
GND
AFE_WD
DATAN2_Y 33 33 33 33 DATAN2_Y GND 12 12 29 29 GND
GND 34 34 34 34 GND AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
DATAP1_Y 35 35 35 35 DATAP1_Y YC1 YC3
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
DATAN1_Y 36 36 36 36 DATAN1_Y 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃 䢳 䢳 䢳 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣃 AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
GND 37 37 37 37 GND 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣈䣡䣅 GND 8 8 33 33 GND
CSI_Y
P4_YC
38
39
38
39
38
39
38
39
CSI_Y
P4_YC
APC PWB LED Front
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
BD 40 40 40 40 BD GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
YC27 YC3
+5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU YC1 YC2 +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃 䢳 䢳 䢳 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣃
GND 3 3 6 6 GND 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣎䣇䣆䢢䣔䣡䣅
GND 4 4 5 5 GND YC1 YC2
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A LED Rear +12V 1 1 1 1 +12V
CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
6
7
6
7
3
2
3
2
CLN_MOT_B
+24V4 Laser scanner unit (4 beam) +12V
NC
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
+12V
NC
PGND 8 8 1 1 PGND LED_PWM 4 4 4 4 LED_PWM
LED_ENA 5 5 5 5 LED_ENABLE
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1
2 2 Waste toner motor
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
CCD PWB
Relay
4 4 TH
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT
Weight sensor
GND
+5V2
12
13
12
13
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
5V Image scanner unit
YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Low power voltage PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP
9-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
TH 2 2 1
YC2
1 BELT_TH
Transfer PWB Transfer connect PWB
Belt thermistor GND 1 1 2 2 GND YC1 YC2 YC3 YC32
+24V2_F1 10 1 +24V2_F1 +24V2_F1 10 10 A1 A1 +24V2_F1
NC 9 2 NC NC 9 9 A2 A2 NC
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 A3 A3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
3.3V2 7 4 +3.3V2 3.3V2 7 7 A4 A4 +3.3V2
YC3 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 6 A5 A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
Vm(24V) 1 1 1 1 +24V2_F1 BELT_TH 5 Relay 6 BELT_TH BELT_TH 5 5 A6 A6 BELT_TH
P_GND 2 2 2 2 GND BLT_SCL 4 7 BLT_SCL BLT_SCL 4 4 A7 A7 BLT_SCL
BRAKE 3 3 3 3 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAKE GND 3 8 GND GND 3 3 A8 A8 GND
Belt cleaning motor PWM
CW/CCW
4
5
4
5
4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
9
10
GND
BLT_SDA
GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
2
1
A9
A10
A9 GND
A10 BLT_SDA
3.3V2 6 6 5 5 3.3V2
CHB 7 7
CHA 8 8 6 6 CHA
7 7 GND
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_EFT1
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB (1/2) B5 B5 CW/CCW
B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
B7 B7 GND
B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
Exit unit
A/ 1 4 1 12 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
A 2 3 2 11 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
Rear exit motor B/ 3 2 3 10 B11 IHMOT_1A
B 4 1 4 9 B11 B12 IHMOT_1B
B12
YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Exit reversing motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Lower exit full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Upper exit full sensor GND 2 2 2 11 A9 A9 GND
Vout 1 1 3 10 A10 A10 EXINNER_FULL
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Exit/IH front fan motor
Drum/Developer relay PWB (1/2) YC1 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
GND 10 10
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2_F1 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12 3 1 24V
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
TPC_Y 11 11 B10 B10 TPC_Y
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
2 Relay 2 GND Exit/IH middle fan motor
TPC_C 10 10 B11 B11 TPC_C 1 3 ALM
TPC_M 9 9 B12 B12 TPC_M
TPC_BK 8 8 B13 B13 TPC_BK
DLP_TH 7 7 B14 B14 DLP_TH
EEP_SDA 6 6 B15 B15 EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL 5 5 B16 B16 EEP_SCL
DRM_EEP_SEL1 4 4 B17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DRM_EEP_SEL0 3 3 B18 B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0
3.3V2 2 2 B19 B19 3.3V2
GND 1 1 B20 B20 GND
9-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Chart of image adjustment procedures
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F2_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_FET1
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
B5 B5 CW/CCW
Fuser high voltage PWB (1/2)
3.3V 3 3 B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
IH position sensor GND 2 2 B7 B7 GND
Vout 1 1 B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
B/ 1 4 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
B 2 3 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
IH core motor A 3 Relay 2 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
A/ 4 1 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Lower exit full sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL Feed image PWB (2/6)
12 1
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Upper exit full sensor GND 2 2 2
Relay
11 A9 A9 GND
Vout 1 1 3 10 A10 A10 EXINNER_FULL